WO2021232971A1 - Vehicle positioning method and device - Google Patents

Vehicle positioning method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021232971A1
WO2021232971A1 PCT/CN2021/085478 CN2021085478W WO2021232971A1 WO 2021232971 A1 WO2021232971 A1 WO 2021232971A1 CN 2021085478 W CN2021085478 W CN 2021085478W WO 2021232971 A1 WO2021232971 A1 WO 2021232971A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
vehicle
positioning
color
semi
positioning system
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/085478
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张竞
王发平
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021232971A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021232971A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/005Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 with correlation of navigation data from several sources, e.g. map or contour matching
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/04Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 by terrestrial means
    • G01C21/08Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00 by terrestrial means involving use of the magnetic field of the earth
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F18/00Pattern recognition
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06VIMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V10/00Arrangements for image or video recognition or understanding
    • G06V10/20Image preprocessing
    • G06V10/24Aligning, centring, orientation detection or correction of the image
    • GPHYSICS
    • G08SIGNALLING
    • G08GTRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
    • G08G1/00Traffic control systems for road vehicles
    • G08G1/123Traffic control systems for road vehicles indicating the position of vehicles, e.g. scheduled vehicles; Managing passenger vehicles circulating according to a fixed timetable, e.g. buses, trains, trams

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology and vehicle positioning, and in particular to a vehicle positioning method and device.
  • the vehicle position is an important input parameter for vehicle navigation and planning control, and it is of great significance to realize the real-time positioning of the vehicle position.
  • vehicle positioning mainly relies on Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) and Inertial Navigation System (INS), but when the vehicle is in a tunnel or underground parking lot, the signal is weak or shielded,
  • GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
  • INS Inertial Navigation System
  • the vehicle cannot be positioned due to the inability to receive satellite signals; if in this scenario, the vehicle uses its own inertial measurement unit (IMU) to calculate its real-time position, but due to the cumulative error of the IMU It will increase significantly over time, causing the positioning accuracy of the vehicle to be difficult to meet the demand.
  • IMU inertial measurement unit
  • the embodiment of the application discloses a vehicle positioning method and device, which can realize accurate positioning of vehicles in tunnels, underground parking lots and other spaces where satellite signals are blocked or shielded, and provide continuous positioning capabilities for vehicles until the vehicle leaves Satellite signal positioning blind spot.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a vehicle positioning method.
  • the method includes: after a vehicle enters a semi-enclosed space, monitoring whether the vehicle is within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space; When the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, obtain the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map; position.
  • the vehicle after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, when the vehicle detects that it is located within the preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space, it acquires the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space, and then The location information is used as its current location information combined with a semi-enclosed space map for positioning.
  • Semi-enclosed space refers to a space in which satellite signals are shielded or obscured, resulting in poor or unstable signals.
  • Semi-enclosed space includes underground space with poor signal and above ground space with poor signal.
  • the vehicle may be a human transportation tool or a logistics transportation tool, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space provided with the positioning system, the vehicle can obtain at least one precise position information corresponding to the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space by combining the position relationship between itself and the positioning system.
  • the map can realize the accurate positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space, improve the robustness of the vehicle positioning in the semi-enclosed space with poor signal, and effectively solve the problem that the vehicle is difficult to accurately locate in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a server, or the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a roadside unit at the entrance of a semi-enclosed space, or The map is obtained by the vehicle from other vehicles in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space includes: determining the first position between the vehicle and the positioning system Distance; determining whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the first distance.
  • the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by monitoring its first distance from the positioning system. When the first distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, the vehicle is located in the Within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • the vehicle when the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of a positioning system, the vehicle will obtain the position information of the positioning system, so as to realize the positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space according to the position information of the positioning system, which improves The processing efficiency in the vehicle positioning process saves the computing resources of the vehicle.
  • the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, the map further includes information indicating the height of the first color device from the ground; the positioning device is used for Triggering first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; the determining the first distance between the vehicle and the positioning system includes: taking a first environment image, the first environment image including The image of the first color device; determine the second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image; according to the second distance and the ground clearance of the first color device Height, the first distance is obtained.
  • the first distance is the distance between the vehicle where the image capture device is located and the vertical plane, and the vertical plane is the plane perpendicular to the direction of the vehicle where the positioning device is located;
  • the second distance refers to the vehicle where the image capture device is located and a certain semi-enclosed space.
  • the spatial distance between color devices is the distance between the vehicle where the image capture device is located and the vertical plane, and the vertical plane is the plane perpendicular to the direction of the vehicle where the positioning device is located;
  • the second distance refers to the vehicle where the image capture device is located and a certain semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle after the vehicle obtains the second distance between itself and the color device by processing the first environment image, the vehicle obtains the first distance according to the second distance and the vehicle’s The pitch angle when the image acquisition device photographs the first color device to obtain the first distance.
  • the vehicle combines the computer vision processing technology to process the first environmental image containing the color device to determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system. This method is not affected by environmental factors such as satellite signal shielding in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, and the positioning device is used to trigger the first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device;
  • the first broadcast information includes the location information of the positioning device;
  • the obtaining the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map includes: obtaining the location according to the first broadcast information sent by the positioning device The location information of the device; the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space is determined according to the location information of the positioning device.
  • the first broadcast information includes the position information of the positioning device and the number of the positioning device.
  • the map contains the numbers of multiple positioning systems, vehicles located within the preset range of the positioning device can pass The number in the first broadcast information and the position information of the positioning device are combined with the map to obtain the position information of the positioning system where the positioning device is located.
  • the first broadcast information includes a trigger moment and location information of the positioning device, and the trigger moment is used to indicate the moment when the positioning device is triggered by the vehicle.
  • the positioning the vehicle on the map according to the location information includes: positioning the vehicle on the map according to the location information and the trigger time.
  • the positioning system in addition to sending the first broadcast information immediately when the positioning system is triggered by the vehicle, the positioning system may also send the first broadcast information after a period of time after being triggered. The time delay between the time when the first broadcast information is sent and the time when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information is negligible.
  • the determining the second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image includes: identifying from the first environment image Out the first color device; determine the second distance according to the image of the first color device.
  • the pixel position and size of the first color device in the first environmental image are obtained, according to the pixel position and size of the first color device in the first environmental image And the actual size information of the first color device in the map to determine the second distance between the vehicle and the first color device.
  • the vehicle combines the computer vision processing technology to identify the color device corresponding to the positioning device in the positioning system to determine the second distance from the vehicle to the color device, thereby determining the first distance from the vehicle to the positioning device corresponding to the color device. It is not affected by the shielding of satellite signals in a semi-enclosed space, and because the light environment in the semi-enclosed space is stable, the accuracy of the vehicle identification color device can be improved.
  • the first color device includes one or more identification lights; the recognizing the first color device from the first environment image includes: The color and sequence of the one or more identification lights are used to identify the first color device.
  • the multiple color devices when multiple color devices are provided in a semi-closed space, the multiple color devices are arranged at different positions in the semi-closed space at intervals, and the color devices at different positions have different colors Or the permutation and combination of different colors to reduce the bit error rate of the color recognition device.
  • the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  • the method further includes: discarding the first broadcast information when the vehicle is not within a preset range of the positioning system.
  • the vehicle when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information from a positioning system, if the vehicle determines that it is not within the preset range of the positioning system, the vehicle can directly discard the first broadcast information to save the vehicle side. Computing resources to improve the positioning efficiency of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the monitoring whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space includes: receiving second broadcast information, where the second broadcast information is used for Indicate a vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning system; determine whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information.
  • the task of monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system can be performed by the server or the image acquisition device located in the semi-enclosed space. Therefore, the above-mentioned receiving second broadcast information may be receiving the second broadcast information sent by the server or receiving the second broadcast information sent by the image capture device located in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the second broadcast information when multiple positioning and positioning systems are installed in a semi-enclosed space, the second broadcast information further includes the number of the positioning system, so that the vehicle can determine whether it is itself based on the received second broadcast information. Within the preset range of the positioning system. The second broadcast information is carried in the broadcast channel.
  • the vehicle only needs to receive the second broadcast information indicating the vehicle within the preset range of a certain positioning system, and then match whether it is the vehicle indicated in the second broadcast information, and then it can determine whether the vehicle itself is in the location. Within the preset range of the system.
  • the computing resources on the vehicle side are saved, and the positioning efficiency of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space is improved.
  • the vehicle is provided with a second color device, and the second color device includes one or more identification lights;
  • the second broadcast information carries instruction information, the instruction information Indicates the color and sequence of one or more identification lights;
  • the determining whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space according to the second broadcast information includes: according to the second broadcast Whether the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights indicated by the information matches the second color device to determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • a semi-enclosed space is provided with multiple positioning systems, each positioning system includes a positioning device and an image acquisition device, the color device is set on the vehicle, and the color or color arrangement of the color device on different vehicles The combination is different.
  • the indication information carried in the second broadcast information indicates the color and sequence of at least one color device, and the above-mentioned at least one color device is The color devices of multiple vehicles located within the preset range of the positioning system, when the color device of the vehicle itself is successfully matched with one of the color devices indicated in the second broadcast information, the vehicle is located in the preset range of the positioning system Inside.
  • the method further includes: acquiring movement information of the vehicle; The location information of the vehicle and the movement information of the vehicle navigate the vehicle in the map.
  • the vehicle combines the current position information of the vehicle and the movement information of the vehicle to use the inertial navigation technology to navigate the vehicle, so as to obtain the real-time position of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space during the driving process.
  • the position information of the triggered positioning system is updated to the current position information of the vehicle, thereby realizing the precise positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the multiple positioning systems provided in the semi-enclosed space divide the semi-enclosed space into multiple small sections, so that the driving time of the vehicle in each small section is greatly reduced compared with the driving time in the entire semi-closed space. Therefore, the error accumulated by the inertial navigation of the vehicle in each segment is negligible, which improves the accuracy of vehicle positioning.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a vehicle positioning method, which includes: after a vehicle enters a semi-enclosed space, monitoring whether the vehicle is within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space; When the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, second broadcast information is sent, and the second broadcast information is used to indicate that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system so as to facilitate The vehicle is positioned according to the position information of the positioning system.
  • the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space can monitor the vehicle and determine whether it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space sends out second broadcast information, so that the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information Inside.
  • Semi-enclosed space refers to a space in which satellite signals are shielded or obscured, resulting in poor or unstable signals.
  • Semi-enclosed space includes underground space and above ground space with poor signal.
  • the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space is responsible for the task of monitoring whether the current position of the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • the vehicle side does not need to execute the complex algorithm in the monitoring process, only by receiving the second broadcast information That is, it can be determined whether the own vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, which saves computing resources on the vehicle side and improves the positioning efficiency of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the monitoring whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space includes: monitoring a third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system ; Determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system according to the third distance.
  • the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space can determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system by monitoring the third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system, and the third distance is less than or equal to the preset range. Threshold, the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • the positioning system includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device, the map also includes information indicating the height of the image acquisition device from the ground; the positioning device is used to When the vehicle is located at the positioning device, the first broadcast information containing the location information of the positioning device is triggered; the vehicle is provided with a second color device; the monitoring of the first broadcast information between the vehicle and the positioning system Three distances, including; acquiring a second environment image collected by the image acquisition device, the second environment image including the image of the second color device; determining the vehicle and the image acquisition based on the second environment image The fourth distance between the devices; the third distance is obtained according to the fourth distance and the height of the image acquisition device from the ground.
  • the third distance is the distance between the vehicle on which the color device is located and the vertical plane, and the vertical plane is the plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle on which the positioning device is located;
  • the fourth distance is the spatial distance between the vehicle on which the color device is located and the positioning device .
  • the method for the server or the image acquisition device to obtain the third distance may also be: according to the fourth distance and the image The pitch angle when the acquisition device photographs the second color device to obtain the third distance.
  • the server or the image acquisition device installed in the semi-enclosed space uses computer vision processing technology to process the second environment image containing the color device on the vehicle to determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system. This method is not Affected by the shielding of satellite signals in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  • the determining the fourth distance between the vehicle and the image acquisition device according to the second environment image includes: identifying from the second environment image The second color device; determining the fourth distance according to the image of the second color device.
  • the server or the image acquisition device recognizes the second color device in the second environment image and obtains the pixel position and size of the second color device in the second environment image, according to the second color device in the second environment image.
  • the pixel location and size in the environmental image and the actual size information of the second color device in the map determine the fourth distance.
  • the image acquisition device in the server or semi-enclosed space identifies the color device on the vehicle and then determines the fourth distance of the vehicle to which the color device is located corresponds to the image acquisition device, thereby determining the distance between the vehicle and the positioning device corresponding to the color device.
  • the third distance This method is not affected by the shielding of satellite signals in the semi-enclosed space, and because the light environment in the semi-enclosed space is stable, the accuracy of the color device for identifying the vehicle can be improved.
  • the second color device includes one or more identification lights; the recognizing the second color device from the second environment image includes: The color and sequence of the one or more identification lights are used to identify the second color device.
  • the identification lights in the second color device can be configured to display visible lights of different colors.
  • the second color device may also include at least one light-emitting device, or the second color device may also include one or more colored metal plates.
  • the color device on the vehicle in the second environment image is identified based on the color and sequence of the color device, thereby obtaining the fourth distance of the vehicle from the image acquisition device, and determining the third distance of the vehicle from the positioning device corresponding to the image acquisition device. distance.
  • This method is not affected by the shielding of satellite signals in the semi-enclosed space, and because the light environment in the semi-enclosed space is stable, the accuracy of the color device for identifying the vehicle can be improved.
  • the second broadcast information carries indication information
  • the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights
  • the indication information is used to indicate The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
  • the second broadcast information can be used to assist the vehicle in determining whether its current position is within the preset range of the positioning system, so as to achieve the purpose of monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • the current position of the vehicle is the position information corresponding to the positioning system.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a monitoring device, the monitoring device includes a receiver and a processor, wherein the receiver is used to obtain an environmental image collected by an image acquisition device, and the environmental image includes an image of a color device.
  • the processor is configured to: determine the distance between the color device and the image acquisition device according to the environmental image; according to the positional relationship between the image acquisition device and the color device and the image acquisition device The distance between the image acquisition device and the color device is determined, and the horizontal distance between the image acquisition device and the color device is determined; according to the horizontal distance between the image acquisition device and the color device, it is determined that the vehicle enters the After the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device in the semi-enclosed space, so that the vehicle can be positioned according to the position information of the positioning device.
  • the processor is specifically configured to: identify the color device from the environmental image; determine the color device and the image collection based on the image of the color device The distance between the devices.
  • the color device includes one or more identification lights; the processor is specifically configured to: identify the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights. ⁇ The color device.
  • the color device is a first color device
  • the first color device and the positioning device are located in the semi-enclosed space
  • the image acquisition device and the locating device are located in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the monitoring device is located on the vehicle.
  • the second color device when the color device is a second color device, the second color device is located on the vehicle, and the image acquisition device and the positioning device are located in the half.
  • the monitoring device is integrated into the image acquisition device; the monitoring device further includes: a transmitter for sending second broadcast information when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device , So that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
  • the second color device when the color device is a second color device, the second color device is located on the vehicle, and the image acquisition device and the positioning device are located in the half.
  • the monitoring device is integrated in the server; the receiver is specifically used to: receive the environmental image sent by the image acquisition device; the monitoring device also includes: a transmitter, which is used to When it is within the preset range of the positioning device, sending second broadcast information, so that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
  • the second broadcast information carries indication information
  • the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights
  • the indication information is used to indicate The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device that includes: a monitoring unit for monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space Acquisition unit, used for acquiring the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map when the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system; unit unit, used for The location information locates the vehicle on the map.
  • the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a server, or the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a roadside unit at the entrance of a semi-enclosed space, or The map is obtained by the vehicle from other vehicles in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: determine a first distance between the vehicle and the positioning system; and determine whether the vehicle is located at the Within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, the map further includes information indicating the height of the first color device from the ground; the positioning device is used for Trigger first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; the device further includes a collection unit for shooting a first environment image, the first environment image including the image of the first color device; The monitoring unit is specifically configured to determine a second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image; according to the second distance and the ground clearance of the first color device, Obtain the first distance.
  • the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, and the positioning device is used to trigger the first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device;
  • the first broadcast information includes the location information of the positioning device;
  • the obtaining unit is specifically configured to: obtain the location information of the positioning device according to the first broadcast information sent by the positioning device; determine according to the location information of the positioning device Position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the first broadcast information includes a trigger moment and location information of the positioning device, and the trigger moment is used to indicate the moment when the positioning device is triggered by the vehicle.
  • the positioning unit is specifically configured to locate the vehicle on the map according to the location information and the trigger time.
  • the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the first color device from the first environmental image; determine the first color device according to the image of the first color device Two distance.
  • the first color device includes one or more identification lights; the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the first color device from the first environmental image The color device includes: recognizing the first color device by recognizing the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights.
  • the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  • the positioning unit is further configured to discard the first broadcast information when the vehicle is not within a preset range of the positioning system.
  • the acquiring unit is configured to: receive second broadcast information, the second broadcast information being used to indicate vehicles located within a preset range of the positioning system; and the monitoring The unit is specifically configured to determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information.
  • the vehicle is provided with a second color device, and the second color device includes one or more identification lights;
  • the second broadcast information carries instruction information, the instruction information Indicates the color and sequence of one or more identification lights;
  • the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: according to whether the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights indicated by the second broadcast information match the second color device, To determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system.
  • the acquiring unit is further configured to: acquire the movement information of the vehicle; the positioning unit is further configured to: according to the position information of the vehicle and the movement information of the vehicle Navigating the vehicle in the map.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device that includes: a monitoring unit for monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space ; Broadcast unit: in the case of monitoring that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system, send second broadcast information, the second broadcast information is used to indicate that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system Within the range to facilitate the positioning of the vehicle according to the position information of the positioning system.
  • the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: monitor a third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system; determine whether the vehicle is located at the Within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • the positioning system includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device, the map further includes information indicating the height of the image acquisition device from the ground; the positioning device is used to When the vehicle is located at the positioning device, the first broadcast information containing the location information of the positioning device is triggered; the vehicle is provided with a second color device; the device further includes an acquisition unit for acquiring the image collection A second environmental image taken by the device, where the second environmental image includes an image of the second color device; the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: determine the difference between the vehicle and the image acquisition device according to the second environmental image According to the fourth distance and the ground height of the image acquisition device, the third distance is obtained.
  • the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the second color device from the second environmental image; determine the second color device according to the image of the second color device Four distances.
  • the second color device includes one or more identification lights; the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights Out the second color device.
  • the second broadcast information carries indication information
  • the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights
  • the indication information is used to indicate The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
  • the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a device, which includes: an acquisition unit configured to acquire an environmental image collected by an image acquisition device, where the environmental image includes an image of a color device; and a processing unit is configured to: The environmental image determines the distance between the color device and the image capture device; determines the distance between the image capture device and the color device and the distance between the image capture device and the color device The horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device; according to the horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device, it is determined that the vehicle is located in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space. Within the preset range of the positioning device in the enclosed space, so as to facilitate the positioning of the vehicle according to the position information of the positioning device.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: identify the color device from the environmental image; determine the color device and the image collection based on the image of the color device The distance between the devices.
  • the color device includes one or more identification lights; the processing unit is specifically configured to: identify the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights. ⁇ The color device.
  • the device further includes: a broadcasting unit, configured to send second broadcast information when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device, so that the vehicle Determining whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
  • a broadcasting unit configured to send second broadcast information when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device, so that the vehicle Determining whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
  • the acquisition unit is specifically configured to: receive the environmental image sent by the image acquisition device; the device further includes a broadcasting unit, which is configured to: When the positioning device is within the preset range, sending second broadcast information, so that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
  • the second broadcast information carries indication information
  • the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights
  • the indication information is used to indicate all The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a system that further includes an image acquisition device, a color device, and a positioning device.
  • the color device and the positioning device are arranged in a semi-enclosed space, and the image acquisition device is arranged on a vehicle.
  • the image acquisition device is used to collect the image containing the color device and calculate the horizontal distance between the vehicle and the positioning device based on the image, and determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the horizontal distance, so that the vehicle can determine that it is in the position of the positioning device. Positioning is performed when within the preset range.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a system that further includes an image acquisition device, a color device, and a positioning device.
  • the color device is installed on a vehicle, and the positioning device and the image acquisition device are installed in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the image acquisition device is used to execute the method in the foregoing second aspect or any possible embodiment of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a system that also includes an image acquisition device, a color device, a positioning device, and a server.
  • the color device is installed on the vehicle, and the positioning device and the image acquisition device are installed in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the image acquisition device is used to acquire an image containing the color device and send the image to the server, and the server is used to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible embodiment of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code for device execution, and the program code includes the program code for executing the first aspect or any of the first aspect.
  • a method instruction in a possible implementation.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code for execution by an apparatus, and the program code includes a program code for executing the second aspect or the second aspect. Instructions for methods in any possible implementation.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code for execution by the device, and the program code includes the program code for executing the third aspect or the third aspect. Instructions for methods in any possible implementation.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer software product
  • the computer program software product includes program instructions
  • the device executes the foregoing first aspect or any one of the first aspects.
  • the method in possible embodiments.
  • the computer software product may be a software installation package.
  • the computer software product can be downloaded and executed on the device to achieve The method in the first aspect or any possible embodiment of the first aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer software product.
  • the computer program software product includes program instructions.
  • the device executes the foregoing second aspect or any one of the second aspects.
  • the method in possible embodiments.
  • the computer software product may be a software installation package. In the case that any one of the possible designs provided in the foregoing second aspect needs to be used, the computer software product can be downloaded and executed on the device to achieve The method in the second aspect or any possible embodiment of the second aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer software product.
  • the computer program software product includes program instructions.
  • the device executes the foregoing third aspect or any one of the third aspects.
  • the method in possible embodiments.
  • the computer software product may be a software installation package. In the case that any one of the possible designs provided in the foregoing third aspect needs to be used, the computer software product can be downloaded and executed on the device to achieve The method in the third aspect or any possible embodiment of the third aspect.
  • multiple sets of positioning devices and multiple sets of color devices with different colors can be set up to establish the color device and the positioning device with each other in the scene.
  • the color of the on-board color device can also be recognized by the image acquisition device and the position of the vehicle can be determined in sequence, and then combined with whether the positioning device is triggered by the vehicle to achieve the accurate positioning of the vehicle position. It effectively solves the problem of inaccurate or inaccurate positioning of vehicles in semi-enclosed spaces such as tunnels and parking lots where satellite signals are blocked or shielded, improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces, and reduces The construction cost of vehicle positioning.
  • FIG. 1 is an application system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 2 is another application system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a system architecture of another application provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is a flowchart of a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of another vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of an identification light group provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of yet another identification light group provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of the deployment of an identification light group in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram of another deployment of an identification light group in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of yet another vehicle deployment in a tunnel provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of yet another vehicle deployment in a tunnel provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning scene provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a method for detecting a failure of an indicator lamp provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a vehicle positioning method provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • 14A is a schematic diagram of positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 14B is a schematic diagram of yet another vehicle positioning in a tunnel provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning scene provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning scene provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of another device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • the application of networked communication technology in vehicles is often referred to as the Internet of Vehicles (IoV). It is based on the in-vehicle network, the inter-vehicle network and the in-vehicle mobile Internet.
  • IoV Internet of Vehicles
  • Cars, roads, people, clouds, etc. a large system network for wireless communication and information exchange, that can realize real-time online communication between cars, cars and facilities, cars and the cloud.
  • V2V Vehicle to Vehicle
  • V2I Vehicle to Infrastructure
  • Communication between communication devices; the communication between the car and the cloud is also called Vehicle to Network (V2N), which refers to the communication between the car and the cloud through a cellular network.
  • V2N Vehicle to Network
  • the RGB color model is a color standard in the industry. It obtains a variety of colors by changing the three color channels of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) and superimposing them with each other.
  • RGB is the color representing the three channels of red, green, and blue. This standard includes almost all colors that human vision can perceive, and it is one of the most widely used color systems.
  • the value range of each color channel is [0,255], where "0" means no stimulus, and "255” means the stimulus reaches the maximum value, for example: when R, G, B are three When all values are 0, three-channel synthesis means black; when R, G, and B are all 255, three-channel synthesis means white light.
  • the values (r, g, b) of the three channels are called the color code of the color.
  • An inertial navigation system (Inertial Navigation System, INS) is also called an inertial reference system, which is an autonomous navigation system that does not rely on external information and does not radiate energy to the outside (such as radio navigation).
  • the basic working principle of inertial navigation is based on the laws of Newton’s mechanics.
  • the core component of inertial navigation is the Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU), which is often installed on the center of gravity of the moving body. It is a device used to measure the three-axis attitude angle (or angular rate) and acceleration of the moving body, which mainly includes acceleration.
  • IMU Inertial Measurement Unit
  • the accelerometer is used to detect the acceleration signal of the moving body
  • the gyroscope is used to detect the angular velocity signal of the moving body relative to the navigation coordinate system.
  • the inertial navigation system can calculate the position of the next point from the position of a known point based on the continuously measured heading angle and speed of the moving body, so that it can continuously measure the current position of the moving body.
  • the gyroscope in the inertial navigation system is used to form a navigation coordinate system, so that the measurement axis of the accelerometer is stabilized in the coordinate system, and the heading and attitude angle are given; the accelerometer is used to measure the acceleration of the moving body, and the time The speed is obtained by integrating once, and the displacement can be obtained by integrating the speed once more with respect to time.
  • GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
  • INS Inertial Navigation System
  • the signal is weak or shielded or blocked.
  • the vehicle cannot receive satellite signals in the tunnel or the received satellite signals are weak so that the vehicle cannot perform accurate positioning.
  • Due to the long distance of the tunnel if the vehicle uses its own inertial navigation to calculate its real-time position, the cumulative error of the inertial measurement unit will increase significantly over time, resulting in the inertial navigation accuracy difficult to meet the requirements.
  • Fig. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a vehicle positioning system in a semi-enclosed space applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the system 10 includes a vehicle and at least one set of positioning systems.
  • Each set of positioning systems includes a positioning device and a color device, and each set of positioning systems is set in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the semi-enclosed space allows vehicles to travel.
  • an image acquisition device is installed on the vehicle.
  • the image acquisition device is used to collect an image of the environment in front of the vehicle when the vehicle is driving.
  • the environment image contains the image of the color device.
  • the image acquisition device may be a video camera, a camera or other devices with an image acquisition function, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the image acquisition device in FIG. 1 may be illustrated by taking a camera as an example, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the image acquisition device to only a camera.
  • the positioning device in the positioning system communicates with the vehicle through a wireless connection.
  • Semi-enclosed space refers to a space where vehicles are allowed to travel, but satellite signals are shielded or blocked, resulting in poor or unstable signals.
  • the semi-enclosed space can be underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, underground construction sites, etc., and can also be underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, pits, hidden trenches and other spaces, which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground where vehicles are allowed but the satellite signal is poor, such as: ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, indoor warehouses, etc.
  • a tunnel may be used as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-closed space to only a tunnel.
  • the vehicle also contains a monitoring device, which is used to process and analyze the environmental image collected by the camera, for example, to identify the color device in the environmental image, to calculate the color device and the camera based on the image of the color device
  • a monitoring device which is used to process and analyze the environmental image collected by the camera, for example, to identify the color device in the environmental image, to calculate the color device and the camera based on the image of the color device
  • the vehicle can combine the received first broadcast information from when the positioning device is triggered, according to the The position of the positioning device realizes its own positioning in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the monitoring device can be integrated in the camera of the vehicle, or can exist in the vehicle independently of the camera, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the camera can directly process the environment image after collecting the environmental image containing the color device, and the processing result indicates that the vehicle is located in the preset position of the positioning device corresponding to the color device.
  • the camera may communicate with a control unit (for example, a processor) in the vehicle to enable the control unit to locate the vehicle according to the position information of the positioning device.
  • the monitoring device when the monitoring device is integrated in the vehicle but independent of the presence of the camera in the vehicle, the monitoring device first obtains the environmental image including the color device collected by the camera, and performs corresponding processing on the environmental image, and the processing result indicates the vehicle
  • the monitoring device may communicate with a control unit (for example, a processor) in the vehicle to enable the control unit to locate the vehicle according to the location information of the positioning device.
  • a control unit for example, a processor
  • the color device can be used to display a single color, or it can be used to display multiple different colors at the same time.
  • Multiple color devices are installed in the tunnel, usually on the top of the tunnel, so that the vehicle's camera can easily capture the color device. In some possible embodiments, it may also be installed on the side wall of the tunnel, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application. Since the tunnel is generally long, multiple color devices are arranged at intervals. In short, the color device is as direct as possible to the moving vehicle, and when the vehicle is running at high speed, it can effectively reduce the interference caused by the optical flow.
  • the color device may be an identification light group, the identification light group includes at least one identification light, and each identification light can be set to display a color of visible light in advance, and the number of identification lights in each identification light group is more At this time, each identification light group presents a permutation and combination of multiple colors.
  • the color device may also be at least one colored metal plate or other device that can display colors, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the positioning device may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  • the triggered positioning device can broadcast a broadcast message indicating that it is triggered to all nearby vehicles. Since the positioning device corresponds to the color device one-to-one, if the number of the positioning device and the color device are both K, that is, the Ki-th color device corresponds to the Ki-th positioning device. Since the Ki-th positioning device and the Ki-th color device are installed in the same position, the position of the Ki-th color device and the position of the Ki-th positioning device are both the same as the position information of the Ki-th positioning system.
  • the embodiment of the application does not specifically limit the installation position of the color device and the positioning device in the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the color device and the positioning device in the positioning system can be set in the direction of the vehicle.
  • the same vertical plane such as the same location at the same height, the same location at different heights, where the same location refers to the same plane; in addition, the color device and the positioning device can also be set on different planes perpendicular to the direction of the vehicle.
  • the distance between the color device and the plane where the positioning device is located should not be too far apart.
  • FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a semi-enclosed space vehicle positioning system applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the system 20 may include a server, a vehicle, and at least one set of positioning systems, where each set of positioning systems includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device, the positioning system is installed in a semi-enclosed space, and a vehicle is installed Color device. Multiple positioning devices, multiple image acquisition devices, and vehicles communicate with the server through wireless connections.
  • the image acquisition device may be a video camera, a camera or other devices with an image acquisition function, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the image acquisition device in FIG. 2 may be illustrated by taking a camera as an example, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the image acquisition device to only a camera.
  • Semi-enclosed space refers to the space where vehicles are allowed to travel but the satellite signal is poor.
  • Semi-enclosed space can be underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, underground construction sites, etc., or underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, etc. Spaces such as pits and dark ditches are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, indoor warehouses, etc.
  • a tunnel may be used as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-closed space to only a tunnel.
  • the function of the server is that, on the one hand, it is used to receive the collected environmental images sent by the cameras in the positioning system, and store these environmental images according to the camera numbers.
  • the server is also integrated with a monitoring device for processing and analyzing the received environmental image, for example, identifying the color device in the environmental image, calculating the distance between the color device and the camera based on the image of the color device, etc. , To monitor whether there is a vehicle within the preset range of the positioning device corresponding to the camera. If there is a vehicle within the preset range of the positioning device, the second broadcast information is sent out, and the second broadcast information indicates that it is located in the preset range of the positioning device. Vehicles within range.
  • the server may also send a map of the semi-enclosed space to vehicles that are about to enter or have entered the semi-enclosed space.
  • the map includes the location information of the positioning system, the number of the camera, and the height of the camera from the ground.
  • the server may also broadcast the first broadcast information to the outside, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle has triggered the positioning system.
  • the color device is installed on the vehicle, usually on the top of the vehicle, so that it can be easily captured by a camera installed in a semi-enclosed space. In some possible embodiments, the color device may also be installed on the front cover of the vehicle or other conspicuous locations on the vehicle.
  • the color device is a device that can adjust the color, for example, an identification light group.
  • the identification light group includes at least one identification light. Each identification light can be set to display one color of visible light, and one identification light group presents a different color Permutations. It should be noted that the colors or the order of the colors presented by the color devices on different vehicles are different. In other words, the color devices on each vehicle are unique.
  • Cameras usually, are installed on the top of the ceiling of the tunnel, and are used to photograph the color devices on the vehicles in the tunnel.
  • the camera sends the collected images to the server, so that the server stores the received images according to the camera number. Since the tunnel is generally long, multiple cameras are installed at intervals in the tunnel, and the distance between adjacent cameras may be fixed, or it may be adjusted according to local conditions such as the curve parameters of the tunnel, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the positioning device may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor, and the location information of the positioning device is stored in the server.
  • the positioning device may directly send the first broadcast information to the outside, or may report its own number to the server so that the server may send the first broadcast information, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first broadcast information may also carry the position information of the positioning device to assist the vehicle in realizing its precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the installation position of the image acquisition device and the positioning device in the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the image acquisition device and positioning device can also be set perpendicular to the vehicle’s driving direction The distance between the image acquisition device and the plane where the positioning device is located should not be too far apart.
  • Fig. 3 exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a semi-enclosed space vehicle positioning system applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the system 30 may include a vehicle and at least one set of positioning systems, where each set of positioning systems includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device.
  • the positioning system is installed in a semi-enclosed space, and a color is installed on the vehicle. Device.
  • the multi-group positioning system communicates with the vehicle through a wireless connection.
  • the image acquisition device may be a video camera, a camera or other devices with an image acquisition function, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the image acquisition device in FIG. 3 may be illustrated by taking a camera as an example, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the image acquisition device to only a camera.
  • Semi-enclosed space refers to a space that allows vehicles to travel but has poor satellite signals.
  • Semi-enclosed space can be large spaces such as underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, and underground construction sites, as well as underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, and culverts. , Pits, dark trenches and other spaces where signals are severely blocked, and the embodiments of this application do not make specific limitations.
  • the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, indoor warehouses, etc.
  • a tunnel may be used as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-closed space to only a tunnel.
  • the camera usually installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, is used to shoot the color device on the vehicle in the tunnel to obtain the environmental image including the color device on the vehicle.
  • the camera is also integrated with a monitoring device so that the camera can directly capture Processing and analysis of the environment image, for example, identifying the color device in the environment image, calculating the distance between the color device and its own camera based on the image of the color device, etc., to monitor whether a vehicle is located in the preset positioning device corresponding to the camera Within the range, if a vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device, the second broadcast information is sent out, and the second broadcast information indicates a vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning device. Since the tunnel is generally long, there may be multiple cameras installed at intervals in the tunnel. The distance between adjacent cameras may be fixed, or it may be adjusted according to local conditions such as the curve parameters of the tunnel. The embodiment of this application does not specifically limit it. .
  • the color device is located on the vehicle.
  • the color device please refer to the related description in the embodiment of FIG.
  • the positioning device can be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  • the positioning device may send out first broadcast information, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning device.
  • the first broadcast information may also carry the position information of the positioning device to assist the vehicle in realizing its precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the following describes a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the vehicle after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle needs to monitor whether the vehicle is currently within the preset range of the positioning system. In short, it is to monitor whether the vehicle is located near the positioning system. Exemplarily, the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by calculating the distance between itself and the positioning system. In some possible embodiments, the vehicle may also determine whether it is the vehicle by receiving broadcast information indicating a vehicle within the preset range of the positioning system, and never determines whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • a semi-enclosed space is a space that allows vehicles to travel but has poor satellite signals due to signal shielding or occlusion.
  • Semi-enclosed spaces can be large spaces such as underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, and underground construction sites, as well as underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, pits, hidden trenches and other spaces with serious signal obstruction. Examples of this application There is no specific limitation. It should be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, the semi-enclosed space does not refer to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, etc.
  • the vehicle in the embodiment of the present application is an example of a means of transportation, and the vehicle can generally refer to transportation means such as cars, automobiles, tourist buses, bicycles, and electric vehicles.
  • the vehicle may also be a logistics transportation tool such as an electric forklift, a mining truck, or a truck, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the positioning system includes a positioning device and a first color device that are set at the same location and different heights.
  • the vehicle determines whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by calculating the first distance between itself and the positioning system.
  • the specific process is as follows : The camera on the vehicle captures an environmental image containing the color device in the driving section ahead, determines the second distance between itself and the first color device by identifying the first color device in the environmental image, and then combines the first color device with the vehicle
  • the above position relationship (for example, the vertical height difference) determines the first distance of the vehicle from the positioning device, and the first distance also represents the distance of the vehicle from the positioning system where the positioning device is located.
  • a semi-enclosed space map is stored in the vehicle, and the map contains information indicating the ground clearance of the first color device. Since the ground clearance of the camera on the vehicle is known, the vehicle can The vertical height difference between the first color device and the vehicle camera is obtained, and the first distance between the vehicle and the positioning device corresponding to the first color device can be calculated. For example, if the first distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system; if the first distance is greater than the preset threshold, the vehicle is not located within the preset range of the positioning system.
  • each set of positioning systems includes color devices and positioning devices set at the same location and different heights, and the colors or color arrangement sequence of the color devices at different locations different.
  • let’s take a group of positioning systems as an example. After a vehicle captures a first environmental image containing the color devices in the group of positioning systems through a camera, the color device can be identified by identifying the color of the color device, so that the map is also known. Information about the color device in the.
  • the vehicle obtains the analysis result of the color of the color device from the first environment image, the analysis result indicates the color and order of the color device, and the vehicle compares the analysis result with each color device in the semi-enclosed space map according to the analysis result. Therefore, the vehicle can determine the number of the recognized color device in the semi-enclosed space, and can also obtain the ground height of the color device from the map. The vehicle can further calculate the position between its own vehicle and the positioning device corresponding to the color device. A distance.
  • the positioning system includes a color device and a positioning device
  • the color device and positioning device in the positioning system can be set on the same plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle, such as the same location at the same height, and the same location at different heights.
  • the same position refers to the same plane; in addition, the color device and the positioning device can also be set on different planes perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle, but the distance between the color device and the plane where the positioning device is located should not be too different Far.
  • This application does not specifically limit the installation positions of the color device and the positioning device in the same positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle monitors whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by calculating the first distance, and the map of the semi-enclosed space stored in the vehicle may be
  • the vehicle pre-stored can be obtained from the server or the roadside unit at the entrance of the semi-enclosed space or the vehicle that has entered the semi-enclosed space before the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space. It comes with a navigation map.
  • the vehicle before the vehicle enters a semi-enclosed space, it can use its GPS positioning to determine the current semi-enclosed space closest to its own vehicle, and finally obtain the semi-enclosed space map from the built-in navigation map .
  • the vehicle may also download the semi-enclosed space from the server after entering the semi-enclosed space but before identifying the color device in the semi-enclosed space or before the vehicle starts to monitor whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system
  • This application does not specifically limit the map or the map sent by the vehicle in front that receives the map in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle monitors whether it is in the vehicle by receiving the broadcast information indicating the vehicle within the preset range of the positioning system (that is, the second broadcast information hereinafter).
  • the preset range of the positioning system the time point at which the vehicle obtains the map of the semi-enclosed space can be in addition to the above-mentioned situations. It also includes that the vehicle can only get from the server or the semi-enclosed space when it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system. Obtain or download the map of the semi-enclosed space from other vehicles and other places.
  • the time for the vehicle to acquire the map of the semi-enclosed space needs to be before the time point when the vehicle executes S102 to acquire the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space in the map.
  • a semi-enclosed space is provided with at least one set of positioning systems, each set of positioning systems includes cameras and positioning devices set at the same location and different heights, and the semi-enclosed space is not provided with a color device, but is installed on a vehicle entering the semi-enclosed space There are color devices.
  • the color or color arrangement sequence of the color devices of different vehicles is different.
  • the way for the vehicle to monitor whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system can also be: the vehicle receives the second broadcast information, and the second broadcast information indicates that it is located in the For vehicles within the preset range of the positioning system, the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information.
  • the second broadcast information may be sent by the server.
  • the camera integrates functions such as image processing, analysis and calculation
  • the second broadcast information may also be directly sent by a camera in a semi-enclosed space. , This application does not make specific restrictions.
  • the camera and positioning device in the positioning system can be set on the same plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle.
  • the position refers to the same plane; in addition, the camera and the positioning device can also be set on different planes perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle, but the distance between the plane where the camera and the positioning device are located should not be too far apart.
  • This application does not specifically limit the installation positions of the camera and the positioning device in the same positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the second broadcast information indicates the color or color arrangement sequence of the color device
  • the color device referred to in the second broadcast information is the color device of a vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning system, and the vehicle can Match the color or sequence indicated by the second broadcast information with the color device of the vehicle. If the matching is successful, it means that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system; if the matching fails, it means that the vehicle is not located in the positioning system. Within the preset range.
  • the color devices can be set on the ceiling or the height of the wall in the semi-enclosed space to facilitate the collection by the vehicle's camera.
  • the number of color devices in the semi-closed space is the same as the number of positioning devices, and the color devices and the positioning devices correspond one-to-one.
  • color devices at different positions are usually made to have different colors or different color arrangement sequences, and there are obvious visual differences between two or more adjacent color devices, which greatly reduces the recognition.
  • the bit error rate of the color device at different positions can realize the positioning requirement of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the two color devices are often set in two places far apart in the semi-enclosed space, such as a tunnel. Entrance and exit.
  • the color device may be an identification lamp group, and each identification lamp group includes at least one identification lamp or other light-emitting device.
  • the identification lamp or the light-emitting device may be an incandescent lamp, a halogen lamp, a fluorescent lamp, an energy-saving lamp, an LED lamp, High-pressure sodium lamps, metal halide lamps, electrodeless lamps, neon lamps, etc., and the light-emitting color of each sign or light-emitting device can be adjusted according to color coding. Therefore, the display colors of the color devices at different positions are set in advance according to the color code.
  • the color device may also be a colored metal plate, and the number of the metal plate is at least one.
  • the color device displays multiple different colors at the same time.
  • each color device has a corresponding color code.
  • the color code indicates the color and/or color arrangement sequence of the color device.
  • the color code of the color device is stored in a semi-closed space map.
  • the color device may also be other colored devices, which are not specifically limited by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the vehicle obtains position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map.
  • the vehicle when the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system, it means that the vehicle has triggered the positioning system, and the vehicle can obtain the positioning system's location in the semi-enclosed space from the map of the semi-enclosed space. location information.
  • the location information of the positioning system is stored in the map of the semi-enclosed space. It should be noted that the manner and time for the vehicle to obtain the map of the semi-enclosed space can refer to the relevant description in S101, and for the sake of brevity of the description, it will not be repeated here.
  • the so-called position information can be the coordinate value of the positioning system in any coordinate system.
  • the positioning system corresponds to the longitude, latitude and altitude in the world geodetic coordinate system (Word Geodetic System 1984, WGS84).
  • the composed three-dimensional coordinates may also be three-dimensional coordinates composed of X, Y, and Z coordinates in the natural coordinate system or coordinates in other coordinate systems.
  • the position information may also indicate that the positioning system is away from the entrance or exit of the semi-enclosed space. the distance.
  • each group of positioning systems in a semi-enclosed space includes a color device and a positioning device, and when the camera is located in the vehicle, the vehicle is based on the calculated first distance (the positioning device corresponding to the camera and the color device).
  • the vehicle can obtain the set of positioning devices and the positioning device from the map in the semi-enclosed space. Location information of the positioning system where the color device is located.
  • the vehicle compares the identified color devices with each color device in the semi-enclosed space map to determine the number of the identified color device in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the position information of the positioning system corresponding to the color device can be obtained on the map of the semi-enclosed space according to the number of the color device.
  • each group of positioning systems in a semi-enclosed space includes a camera and a positioning device, and the color device is located in the vehicle
  • the second broadcast information received by the vehicle indicates the preset location of the positioning system.
  • Set the vehicles within the range for example, that is, the second broadcast message carries color codes not only for the color devices of the vehicles located within the preset range of the positioning system, and the color codes indicate the colors and colors of the color devices on these vehicles.
  • the second broadcast information also carries the number of the positioning system where the color device is located, so that after the vehicle is successfully matched with the color device indicated in the second broadcast information, it means that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system .
  • the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space can be obtained from the map of the semi-enclosed space according to the number of the positioning system where the color device is located.
  • the vehicle determines that it is currently within the preset range of a certain positioning system, it can also be considered that the vehicle has approached the positioning system but has not triggered the positioning system at the corresponding position of the positioning system. If and only when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information sent when the positioning system is triggered, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning system at the location corresponding to the positioning system, the vehicle can be determined to be itself When the positioning system is triggered, the vehicle can obtain the position information of the positioning system from the map in the semi-enclosed space to assist the vehicle in achieving precise positioning.
  • the map in the semi-enclosed space is marked with a number that characterizes the location of the color device and the location system where the corresponding positioning device is located, but there is no specific location information.
  • the first broadcast The information can also carry the location information of the positioning device and the number of the positioning device, so that the vehicle can match the number corresponding to the identified color device with the number of the positioning device in the first broadcast information. If the matching is successful, the vehicle can The position information of the positioning device in the first broadcast information is used as the position information of the positioning system in which the positioning device is located in the semi-enclosed space.
  • each set of positioning systems in a semi-enclosed space includes a positioning device and a color device, but the positioning device and the color device are located at different heights in similar positions, and only the colors in the set of positioning systems are displayed on the map.
  • the location information corresponding to the device.
  • the vehicle when the vehicle is determined to be within the preset range of a positioning system, the vehicle also needs to receive the first broadcast information sent when the positioning device in the positioning system is triggered.
  • the information carries the position information and number of the positioning device, and the vehicle can obtain the position information of the positioning device from the first broadcast information, thereby obtaining the position information of the positioning system where the positioning device is located in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the positioning device in the positioning system may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor or other devices that can detect whether a vehicle passes by.
  • the vehicle locates itself on the map according to the location information of the positioning system.
  • the vehicle can be based on the position information of the positioning system. Position itself in a semi-enclosed space map. Specifically, the vehicle uses the position information of the positioning system as the position information of the vehicle, so as to realize the positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system, and the vehicle receives the first broadcast information sent when the positioning device corresponding to the positioning system is triggered, the vehicle can follow the A broadcast information determines the location information of the positioning system, and combines it with a map to realize its own precise positioning. Specifically, the vehicle uses the position information of the positioning system as the position information of the vehicle, so as to realize the positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the positioning system may also send the first broadcast information after a period of time after the positioning system is triggered, and the first broadcast information received by the vehicle from the positioning system carries the trigger time and the The position information of the positioning system. If the vehicle is currently within the preset range of the positioning system, the current position information of the vehicle can be calculated according to the trigger time, position information, current time and the movement information of the vehicle in the first broadcast information, so as to achieve The positioning of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space. It should be noted that the trigger moment is used to indicate the moment when the positioning system is triggered by the vehicle.
  • time difference between the time when the positioning system sends the first broadcast information and the time when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information from the positioning system can be ignored.
  • the first broadcast information carries the number of the positioning device. Since the first broadcast information is carried in the broadcast information and is sent, it may cause that when a certain vehicle triggers a certain positioning device, the location in the semi-enclosed space All vehicles have received the first broadcast information sent by the positioning device, but whether the received first broadcast information is useful for the own vehicle remains to be determined.
  • the vehicle receives the first broadcast information sent by the first positioning device when the vehicle is currently located within the preset range of the first positioning device, the first broadcast information is useful to the vehicle; if the vehicle is not currently located in the first positioning device’s Within the preset range but the first broadcast information sent by the first positioning device is received, the first broadcast information is useless for the vehicle; if the current vehicle is within the preset range of the first positioning device, the first broadcast information is also received from the first positioning device. If the first broadcast information from the positioning device and the first broadcast information from the second positioning device are used, the first broadcast information from the first positioning device is useful for the vehicle, and the first broadcast information from the second positioning device is not useful for the vehicle. It should be noted that when the vehicle determines that the first broadcast information is useless to itself, the vehicle may directly discard the first broadcast information that is useless to itself.
  • the vehicle can also use inertial navigation technology to realize its own navigation on the road segment.
  • inertial navigation technology For related descriptions, please refer to the related description in Figure 5 below. , I won’t repeat it here.
  • At least one set of positioning systems are provided in the semi-enclosed space to assist the vehicle in achieving precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle can use the location information of the corresponding positioning system as its own location information to achieve precise positioning within the preset range of the vehicle and/or when receiving information indicating that the positioning system is triggered. This effectively solves the problem of obstructing or shielding satellite signals.
  • the problem of inaccurate or inaccurate positioning of vehicles in tunnels, underground and other scenarios improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces with poor signals, and reduces the construction cost of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces.
  • FIG. 5 based on the system architecture described in the above implementation, the following describes a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It should be noted that the embodiment in FIG. 5 may be independent of the embodiment in FIG. 4, or may be a supplement to the embodiment in FIG. 4. The method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • a map of the semi-enclosed space needs to be obtained first, and the map contains the position information of the positioning system installed in the semi-enclosed space in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the positioning system is used to sense whether a vehicle passes by, and the positioning system includes a positioning device, which may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  • a semi-enclosed space is a space that allows vehicles to travel but has poor satellite signals due to shielding or occlusion.
  • Semi-enclosed spaces can be large spaces such as underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, and underground construction sites, as well as underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, pits, hidden trenches and other spaces with serious signal obstruction. Examples of this application There is no specific limitation. It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, etc.
  • the vehicle in the embodiment of the present application is an example of a means of transportation, and the vehicle can generally refer to transportation means such as cars, automobiles, tourist buses, bicycles, and electric vehicles.
  • the vehicle may also be a logistics transportation tool such as a mining cart, a truck, etc., which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the way for the vehicle to obtain the map of the semi-enclosed space may be obtained from the server.
  • the vehicle sends a first request to the server.
  • the first request is used to request the server to send a map of the semi-enclosed space.
  • the first request carries the current location information of the vehicle.
  • the first request determines the semi-enclosed space near the vehicle, and sends the vehicle a map of the semi-enclosed space that the vehicle is about to enter.
  • the vehicle can also obtain a map of a semi-enclosed space through its own navigation system. Specifically, before the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, the current location information is determined through its own navigation system. For example, the name of the semi-enclosed space near its location can be determined, and then the corresponding semi-enclosed space information can be obtained from the map of the navigation system. The map is fine.
  • the vehicle may also obtain the map from the roadside unit at the entrance of the semi-enclosed space, or may also obtain the map by receiving the map sent by other vehicles that have entered the semi-enclosed space.
  • the map of the semi-enclosed space may also be carried by the vehicle when it leaves the factory and stored in the memory of the vehicle, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the positioning system includes a positioning device.
  • the so-called positioning system being triggered means that a vehicle is very close to the positioning device, a vehicle passes through the positioning device, or a vehicle is located at the positioning device, causing the positioning device to be triggered.
  • the positioning system sends first broadcast information to all vehicles in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the first broadcast information is used to indicate that a vehicle has triggered the positioning system.
  • the first broadcast information can be used to assist the vehicle in determining whether the positioning system is triggered by itself.
  • the positioning system includes a positioning device, which can be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor, and the positioning device is used to sense whether a vehicle passes by.
  • the positioning system can immediately send the first broadcast information when it is triggered by the vehicle, and the positioning system can also send the first broadcast information within a period of time after the positioning system is triggered, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first broadcast information may also carry the trigger moment, which is used to indicate the moment when the positioning system is triggered, so that the vehicle can calculate according to the trigger moment, the position information of the positioning system, the current moment, and the movement information. The current position of the vehicle can thus be positioned.
  • the positioning device may be a positioning grating, which can be used to emit laser or infrared rays, and the positioning grating is usually arranged on the side of a semi-enclosed space lane.
  • the positioning grating determines that there is a vehicle passing by according to the intensity change of the reflected laser or infrared, that is, a vehicle triggers the positioning grating, and the positioning grating senses it. , Which sends the first broadcast message to all nearby vehicles.
  • the first broadcast message carries the number of the triggered positioning grating.
  • the positioning device may be a geomagnetic sensor, which may be used to detect the presence of a vehicle, and the geomagnetic sensor is generally buried in a lane set in a semi-enclosed space. Specifically, when a vehicle passes by, the vehicle cuts the magnetic line of induction of the geomagnetic sensor to cause a change in the magnetic field. The geomagnetic sensor will then sense that a vehicle passes, which means that the geomagnetic sensor is triggered. After the geomagnetic sensor detects it, That is, the first broadcast message is sent to all nearby vehicles. When there are multiple geomagnetic sensors in a semi-enclosed space, the first broadcast message carries the number of the geomagnetic sensor that is triggered.
  • the semi-enclosed space when the semi-enclosed space is large, multiple positioning systems can be arranged in the semi-enclosed space at intervals according to actual needs.
  • the distance between two adjacent positioning systems can be fixed or based on the semi-enclosed space.
  • the internal structure of the system is adapted to local conditions.
  • the precise position of each group of positioning systems has been measured in advance, and each positioning system has a unique number, and its number corresponds to its position one-to-one.
  • the number and position information of the positioning system can be stored in a semi-enclosed space map, or only the number of the positioning system can be stored in a semi-enclosed space map, and the position information and number of the positioning device can be included in the first broadcast information Was broadcast.
  • the server when a vehicle triggers a positioning system, the server can directly sense which positioning system in the semi-enclosed space is triggered.
  • the server may send out the first broadcast information, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning system.
  • the positioning system when a vehicle triggers the positioning system, the positioning system first reports its own number to the server, and the server sends out the first broadcast information.
  • the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning system. .
  • the vehicle receives the first broadcast information, and when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system, obtains the location information of the positioning system on the map, and locates the vehicle on the map according to the location information.
  • the first broadcast information received by the vehicle can assist the vehicle to determine whether the positioning system is triggered by itself.
  • the vehicle triggers the positioning system.
  • the positioning system can obtain the position information of the positioning system from the map, and use the position information of the positioning system as the position information of the vehicle to locate the vehicle on the map.
  • the relevant description in S102 for the specific operation of the vehicle to obtain the location information of the positioning system from the map, refer to the relevant description in S102, which will not be repeated here.
  • the vehicle may also first receive the first broadcast information from a positioning device, and then determine whether the vehicle is currently located within the preset range of the positioning device. When the vehicle determines that it is currently located within the preset range of the positioning device When it is within the range, the position information of the positioning device is used as the position information of the vehicle for positioning; when the vehicle is not within the preset range of the positioning device, the first broadcast information received from the positioning device this time is discarded.
  • the first broadcast information received by the vehicle carries the location information and the trigger time of the positioning device.
  • the vehicle can use the first broadcast information
  • the location information and trigger time of the positioning device are combined with the current time and the vehicle's motion information to locate the vehicle on the map.
  • the occurrence or execution sequence of receiving the first broadcast information and whether the vehicle monitors whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system is not specifically limited.
  • the first broadcast information please refer to S103.
  • S103 For the sake of brevity of the description, it will not be repeated here.
  • the position information of the current positioning system can be used as the position information of the vehicle to realize accurate positioning of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle can also obtain its own motion information, such as the acceleration, speed, and driving direction of the vehicle. Based on the obtained precise position (that is, the position information of the current positioning system) and the vehicle’s motion information, the vehicle can use its own motion information.
  • the inertial navigation system navigates the vehicle on a map in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle can compare the vehicle on the map based on its own location information and movement information. Navigate. It should be noted that the so-called vehicle triggering the next positioning system means that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the next positioning system and the vehicle receives the first broadcast information indicating that the next positioning system is triggered.
  • the inertial navigation system is based on the quadratic integration of the acceleration measured by the inertial measurement unit IMU and the positioning of the current position of the vehicle, the IMU will accumulate errors, and the accumulated errors will increase significantly over time. Since multiple positioning systems are arranged at intervals in the semi-enclosed space, and the distance between two adjacent positioning systems is much smaller than the length of the entire semi-enclosed space, the distance between two adjacent positioning systems The resulting cumulative error of the IMU is negligible.
  • At least one set of positioning systems are provided in the semi-enclosed space to assist the vehicle in achieving precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the vehicle When the vehicle is located in the positioning system
  • the vehicle When the vehicle is within the preset range and receives trigger information from the positioning system, the vehicle can achieve precise positioning according to the location information of the corresponding positioning system, which effectively solves the problem that the vehicle cannot be positioned in the tunnel or underground where the satellite signal is blocked or shielded. Or the problem of inaccurate positioning improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in a semi-enclosed space with poor signal and saves the construction cost of vehicle positioning.
  • a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application, in which a tunnel may be used as an example in a semi-enclosed space, and an identification light group may be used as an example in the color device.
  • the positioning device may take a positioning grating as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-enclosed space to be only a tunnel, the color indicating device is only an identification light group, or the positioning device is only a positioning grating. It should be noted that, in the embodiment of FIG.
  • K groups of positioning systems are set in the tunnel, and each group of positioning systems includes a positioning grating and a marking light group, that is, there are K positioning gratings and K marking light groups, and K is greater than An integer of 1.
  • the embodiment in FIG. 6 may be independent of the embodiment in FIGS. 4 and 5, or may be a supplement to the embodiment in FIGS. 4 and 5.
  • the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the vehicle before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle sends a first request to the third device to obtain a map of the target tunnel.
  • the third device may be a server, a roadside unit at the entrance of the target tunnel, or other vehicles that have entered the target tunnel, etc., which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the third device may take a server as an example to illustrate. Before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, it sends a first request to the server. The first request carries the current location information of the vehicle, so that the server can determine the tunnel closest to the vehicle according to the location information carried in the first request.
  • This application is implemented The target tunnel in the example.
  • the vehicle may also obtain the map of the target tunnel from the roadside unit at the entrance of the target tunnel or other vehicles that have entered the target tunnel, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • S302 The server sends a map of the target tunnel to the vehicle.
  • the server after the server receives the first request from the vehicle, it determines the tunnel closest to the vehicle as the target tunnel according to the position of the vehicle carried in the first request, and then sends a map of the target tunnel to the vehicle.
  • the map contains The number and position information of the K group positioning system. It should be noted that the color device and the positioning device in the same group of positioning systems share the same number and the same location information.
  • the server before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the server detects that there is a vehicle through a camera at the entrance of the target tunnel, and the server may directly send a map of the target tunnel to the vehicle about to enter the target tunnel.
  • the positioning grating is used to detect whether there is a vehicle passing by, and the K positioning gratings are arranged in the target tunnel at intervals. This is because when the tunnel is long, setting the K positioning gratings at intervals can reduce the length of the tunnel. Divided into several sections, a precise position can be obtained when the vehicle passes through the corresponding positioning grating in each section, which helps to realize the precise positioning of the vehicle in the tunnel.
  • the vehicle receives the obtained map of the target tunnel.
  • the vehicle-mounted camera can be used to collect the first environment image in front of the vehicle when it is driving, and the first environment image contains the image of the Ki-th identification light group.
  • the camera includes a camera, and may also include one or more of a depth sensor, an RGB image sensor, or a structured light image sensor.
  • the first environment image is an RGB image.
  • the identification light group is usually installed on the ceiling of the target tunnel, so that the camera of the vehicle driving in the target tunnel can easily collect the image of the identification light group.
  • the identification light group includes at least one identification light, and the luminous color of each identification light is preset according to a color code, and the color code indicates the color and sequence of the identification light group. Because tunnels are generally relatively long and narrow, in order to realize the positioning of vehicles in the tunnel, multiple identification light groups are often set in the tunnel, and the number of identification light groups is the same as the number of positioning gratings in the tunnel, and a marking light is set near each positioning grating Group, the positioning grating corresponds to the identification light group one by one.
  • the identification light groups at different positions are often configured to display different colors or different color combinations.
  • FIG. 7A exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of a group of identification lights.
  • the group of identification lights includes 4 identification lights, and the 4 identification lights are all fixed on the same crossbar.
  • the 4 identification lights are arranged in a row from left to right and are located on the same horizontal line. It can be seen from Fig. 7A that the color of each indicator light is different.
  • FIG. 7B exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of another group of identification light groups.
  • the group of identification lights includes 4 identification lights, and the 4 identification lights are arranged in two rows and two columns. There are 2 marking lights in each row, and the colors of the 4 marking lights are different. Therefore, the identification lights in the identification light group can be arranged in order from left to right, or arranged in multiple rows.
  • the number of identification lights in the identification light group is not specifically limited in this application.
  • Fig. 8A exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of the deployment of a sign light group in a tunnel. It can be seen that a group of sign light groups is set above each lane in Fig. 8A, and each group of sign light groups contains 4 Of course, the two sets of identification lights display different color permutations and combinations (not shown in the figure).
  • the identification lights of each identification light group are arranged in the direction perpendicular to the lane, that is, the crossbar of the identification light group is perpendicular to the lane line on the ground, and the direction is perpendicular to the speed of the vehicle. This setting can effectively reduce the optical flow phenomenon. Interference, thereby reducing the interference to the color recognition of the identification light group.
  • the identification lights of the identification light group can also be arranged in multiple rows, and the deployment mode of the identification lights in the tunnel can be seen in FIG. 8B.
  • FIG. 9 exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel
  • FIG. 9 only exemplarily shows a set of corresponding identification light groups and positioning gratings.
  • the Ki-th identification light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are at the same position and different heights
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing the positioning of the vehicle from a side view. It can be seen that the Ki-th identification The light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are located on the same straight line perpendicular to the ground.
  • the identification light group is installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, the positioning grating is installed on the side wall of the tunnel, and a vehicle-mounted camera is installed on the vehicle to photograph the Ki-th identification light group ahead of driving.
  • the positioning grating may also be installed in front of or behind the corresponding identification light group.
  • the positioning grating emits laser or infrared rays to the opposite wall.
  • the positioning grating can also be installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, and the positioning grating emits laser or infrared rays down the wall.
  • the vehicle recognizes the Ki-th identification light group according to the first environment image, and determines the first distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the vehicle after the vehicle obtains the first environmental image containing the Ki-th identification light group, on the one hand, the vehicle needs to recognize and analyze the color of the Ki-th identification light group in the first environment image through an image processing algorithm, and calculate The second distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th indicator light group (as shown in Figure 9); on the other hand, the vehicle obtains the ground height of the Ki-th indicator light group from the map, according to the ground height of the Ki-th indicator light group and The second distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th identification light group, and the first distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th positioning grating is obtained (as shown in Fig. 9).
  • the second distance refers to the spatial distance between the vehicle where the camera is located and the Ki-th identification light group
  • the first distance refers to the distance between the vehicle where the camera is located and the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the first distance is The distance between the vehicle where the camera is located and the vertical plane, which is the plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle where the Ki-th positioning grating is located.
  • the vehicle can obtain the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th indicator light group in the following way: the vehicle analyzes the color of the Ki-th indicator light group to obtain the analysis result, which indicates the Ki-th indicator light group Color and sequence. Since the colors of the identification light groups at different positions are different, the vehicle can match the analysis result with the color codes of multiple identification light groups in the map to identify the Ki-th identification light group; After the vehicle recognizes the Ki-th marking light group, it can obtain the pixel position of the Ki-th marking light group in the first environment image and the size of the Ki-th marking light group in the first environment image, combined with the map The actual size information of the Ki-th identification light group in the middle can determine the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th identification light group.
  • the ground height of the Ki-th marking light group can be obtained from the map.
  • the Ki-th marking light group is based on the ground height of the Ki-th marking light group and the distance from the vehicle. And the ground height of the camera on the vehicle is known. According to the Pythagorean theorem, the first distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th positioning grating can be obtained.
  • the vehicle after the vehicle obtains the second distance from the Ki-th indicator light group, it can also combine the pitch angle of the Ki-th indicator light group with the camera on the vehicle to obtain the Ki-th indicator light group from the vehicle. Position the first distance of the grating.
  • the Ki-th positioning grating and the Ki-th identification light group in the Ki-th positioning system are located at different heights at similar positions, and the two can be installed one after the other.
  • FIG. 10A from the perspective of the forward direction of the vehicle, the Ki-th identification light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are installed in a semi-enclosed space one after the other, and the first distance is shown in FIG. 10A
  • Figure 10B from the perspective of the forward direction of the vehicle, the Ki-th identification light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are installed in a semi-enclosed space one after the other, and the first distance is shown in Figure 10B.
  • the positioning grating and the marking light group in the same group of positioning system are located at different heights at similar positions, after the vehicle obtains the second distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th marking light group, it also needs to be based on the vehicle camera and the Ki-th marking light group.
  • the vertical height difference between that can be obtained from the ground height of the on-board camera and the height of the Ki-th marking light group
  • the distance difference between the Ki-th marking light group and the Ki-th positioning grating in the direction of the vehicle calculate the first distance .
  • the identification of the identification light group can also be achieved by first determining its position and then performing color analysis. Since the marking light group is usually set above the lane, the imaging position of the marking light group in the first environment image has a certain area. If traditional image processing algorithms are used, the area of interest where the marking light group is located can be obtained by cropping (Or called the target area), if the identification light groups in the identification light group are arranged in order from left to right, the outline of the identification light group is a rectangle, and the recognition sense is recognized by the contour extraction algorithm (for example, canny operator, sift operator, etc.) The contour of each connected domain in the region of interest, when the aspect ratio of the contour meets the preset condition, the corresponding identification light group can be identified, so that the four vertices of the rectangular outline of the identification light group can be determined in the first environment image.
  • the contour extraction algorithm for example, canny operator, sift operator, etc.
  • the pixel position, and the pixel positions of the four vertices are averaged to be the pixel position of the Ki-th identification lamp group.
  • various target detection algorithms in the field of machine vision for example, yolo, faster-rcnn, etc.
  • the target detection algorithm has been very mature and widely used in the field of computer vision, and will not be repeated in this application.
  • the identification lamp groups at different positions are usually shown in different colors or color combinations as much as possible, and the color difference of two or more adjacent identification lamp groups is different. obvious.
  • the RGB color space is a color standard in the industry, and various colors are obtained by superimposing the three color channels of red (Red), green (Green) and blue (Blue) to different degrees.
  • RGB represents the colors of the red, green, and blue channels, and the value range of each channel is [0,255], "0" means no stimulus, and "255” means the stimulus reaches the maximum value, for example: when R, When G and B are all 0, three-channel synthesis means black; when R, G, and B are all 255, three-channel synthesis is white light. Therefore, taking an indicator light in the indicator light group as an example, the color code of a single indicator light can be expressed as (r, g, b), and r, g, b represent the stimulus value of the three channels of red, green, and blue respectively. . Since the RGB color space has three channels, assuming that each channel only takes 0 or 255, there are 8 light color choices for a single sign lamp. In practical applications, each channel can take any value from 0 to 255, and the light-emitting color of the indicator light can be selected in a wider range.
  • the so-called analysis of the color of the identification lamp group by the vehicle refers to obtaining the values (r, g, b) of the three channels of each identification lamp in the identification lamp group, (r, g, b) is also called the color coding of the identification light.
  • the analysis result obtained by the vehicle indicates the number of identification lights in the Ki-th identification light group, the order of the colors, and the color of each identification light.
  • HSV color mode can also be used, where H represents chroma (Hue), S represents saturation (Saturation), and V represents lightness (Value); HSL color mode can also be used, where H Represents chroma (Hue), S represents saturation (Saturation), and L represents brightness (Lightness).
  • HSV color mode and HSL color mode you only need to convert the first environment image from RGB space to HSV space or HSL space, and then obtain the value of each channel in turn.
  • the luminous color of the sign lamp is often set to a color other than the color of the signal lamp such as red, green, and yellow.
  • the target tunnel since the target tunnel is relatively long and narrow, in a straight target tunnel, there may be two or more identification light groups in the first environment image collected by the vehicle. Significantly different, so the size of the identification light group at different positions displayed in the first environment image is also different.
  • the image processing algorithm can be used to segment the identification light group closest to the vehicle, and further, the segmented identification light Color analysis of group colors.
  • the colors or color permutations and combinations of the K identification lamp groups in the tunnel are as different as possible.
  • the distance between the identification light groups is relatively large. Let’s take the example of K (K greater than 2) indicator light groups where two indicator light groups have the same color arrangement and combination. These two indicator light groups have the same color arrangement sequence, and these two indicator light groups are set in the tunnel. When the vehicle obtains the analysis result of one of the identification light groups, it matches it with the identification light groups in the map.
  • the analysis result corresponds to 2 identification light groups.
  • the vehicle can be based on Your own motion information (such as acceleration, speed, etc.) and your initial position before entering the tunnel combined with the inertial navigation system to determine the current distance of the vehicle from the entrance of the tunnel, combined with the distance of each indicator light group contained in the map from the entrance of the tunnel, it can be determined Identify the identification light group by itself, and mark the identification light group in the map. If the vehicle obtains the same analysis result again in the current tunnel, it can be determined that the corresponding identification light group is the two identification light groups The unmarked one.
  • Your own motion information such as acceleration, speed, etc.
  • S305 Determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the first distance.
  • the first distance is compared with the preset threshold.
  • the first distance is the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the vehicle is located at the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the preset threshold value may be 1 meter, 1.5 meters, 2.5 meters, 3 meters or other values, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the preset threshold may be fixed. In some possible embodiments, due to the presence of a curve in a semi-enclosed space, the preset thresholds corresponding to individual positioning gratings are different. In this case, after the vehicle recognizes the Ki-th identification light group, it can determine the corresponding preset threshold of the positioning grating, and then determine the size of the first distance and the preset threshold to determine whether the vehicle is in the Ki-th Within the preset range of a positioning grating.
  • the Ki-th positioning grating When a vehicle triggers the Ki-th positioning grating, the Ki-th positioning grating sends out the first broadcast information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S203 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here. It should be noted that the Ki-th positioning grating is the positioning system in S203.
  • the vehicle receives the first broadcast information, and when the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, obtains the position information of the Ki-th positioning grating in the map, and locates the vehicle on the map according to the position information.
  • the position information of the Ki-th positioning grating in the map For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S204 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
  • S308 Before the vehicle triggers the next positioning grating, the vehicle's motion information is acquired, and the vehicle is navigated on the map according to the vehicle's position information and motion information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S205 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
  • positioning gratings and identification light groups are set in the tunnel to assist vehicles in realizing precise positioning in the tunnel.
  • Vehicles are identified based on the color and sequence of the identification light groups.
  • the identification light groups at different positions in the tunnel determine the position relationship between the vehicle and the positioning grating corresponding to the identification light group.
  • Combining the trigger information from the positioning grating can realize the precise positioning of the vehicle in the tunnel, which effectively solves the problem of satellite positioning.
  • the problem of inaccurate or inaccurate positioning of vehicles in tunnels and underground scenes where the signal is blocked or shielded improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces with poor signals and saves the construction cost of vehicle positioning.
  • vehicle A and vehicle B are driving in a tunnel. Both vehicles A and B are equipped with a camera. Both vehicle A and vehicle B have passed the first positioning grating and are close to the second positioning grating. In the process, vehicle A uses its own camera A to capture the image of the second identification light group in the tunnel, and processes the captured images to determine whether the first distance between itself and the second positioning grating is less than or equal to the preset threshold. When the first distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, it indicates that the vehicle triggers the second positioning grating. Vehicle B also performs the same actions as vehicle A. Therefore, in Figure 11, for vehicle A, the distance between vehicle A and the second positioning grating is just the preset threshold.
  • the second positioning grating is obtained from the map.
  • the position coordinates (B2, L2, H2) of the positioning gratings under the WGS84 coordinates are updated to their current position coordinates and displayed on the vehicle's display screen.
  • the distance between vehicle B and the second positioning grating is greater than the preset threshold, so vehicle B does not detect that it triggers the second positioning grating, so the position coordinates displayed on the display of vehicle B are (B, L, H), has not been updated to the position coordinates of the second positioning grating.
  • the marking lights installed in a semi-enclosed space come from different manufacturers, even if different marking lights are controlled to emit the same color light, it may cause the camera on the vehicle to resolve three different marking lights.
  • the channel values are inconsistent.
  • the lights in the semi-enclosed space may interfere with the color of the identification light
  • the image is decoded in color, and the analysis result is stored in the server as a reference. It is also the source of the color code for identifying the lamp group in the semi-enclosed space map.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a method for detecting a failure of an indicator lamp provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method includes, but is not limited to, the following steps:
  • S401 The vehicle reports the analysis result of the color of the identification lamp group to the server.
  • the vehicle's image acquisition device After the vehicle's image acquisition device recognizes a certain identification light group in the semi-enclosed space, it decodes the color of the identification light group to obtain the analysis result, and determines the location information of the nearest positioning device on the map according to its real-time location. Since the identification light group corresponds to the positioning device one-to-one, the number corresponding to the identification light group is determined. Then, the vehicle can send the analysis result of the identification light group and its corresponding number to the server.
  • S402 The server compares the analysis result with the data in the database, and judges whether the analysis result is within the range.
  • the server After the server receives the analysis result reported by the vehicle and the number of the identification light group corresponding to the analysis result, it finds the reference data of the identification light group in the database according to the number of the identification light group, and obtains the allowable range based on the reference data , And determine whether the analysis result is within the range. If the analysis result is within the range, it means that the identification lamp group can continue to be used, and the failure detection process of the identification lamp ends; if the analysis result is not within the range, execute S303.
  • the three-channel reference value stored in the map for a certain indicator light is (247,9,13), the corresponding standard color is red, and the allowable range is (225 ⁇ 255,0 ⁇ 30,0 ⁇ 30 ), if the analysis result is (220,10,20), the analysis result is not within the range; if the analysis result is (240,10,20), the analysis result is within the range.
  • the server can also remind relevant personnel to prevent the indicator light failure in advance.
  • the server will remind the user that the identification light group needs to be replaced, and at the same time calculate the color code of the replaced identification light group, and replace it
  • the data of the original identification lamp group in the database has completed the update of the database. It should be noted that if only one indicator lamp of the indicator lamp group is aging, only this one indicator lamp needs to be replaced and the data of the corresponding indicator lamp can be updated in the database.
  • the problem of identification lamp failure detection can also be solved by arranging regular inspections of construction vehicles.
  • the engineering vehicle is arranged to photograph, identify and decode each group of identification light groups at regular intervals, and compare the analysis results with the corresponding data in the database to determine whether the color error is within the specified range, if not, replace the identification A light group or an identification light in an identification light group.
  • a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application, in which a tunnel may be used as an example in a semi-enclosed space, and a color device may be used to identify light groups
  • the positioning device may take the positioning grating as an example to illustrate the solution.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-enclosed space to be only a tunnel, the color device is only an identification light group, or the positioning device is only a positioning grating. It should be noted that in the embodiment of FIG.
  • K groups of positioning systems are set in the tunnel, and each group of positioning systems includes a positioning grating and a camera, that is, there are K positioning gratings and K cameras, and K is an integer greater than 1.
  • the identification light group is located on the vehicle.
  • the embodiment in FIG. 13 may be independent of the embodiments in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 6, or may be a supplement to the embodiments in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG.
  • the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • S501 Before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle obtains a map of the target tunnel. For details of this step, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions of S201-S202 in the embodiment of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
  • one identification light group is installed on the vehicle (for example, the top of the vehicle), the identification light group includes at least one identification light, and each identification light can emit colored visible light.
  • the color code indicates the color and sequence of the identification light group of the vehicle.
  • the color code may be obtained by the vehicle from the server, that is, the vehicle may send a second request to the server, and the server allocates a color code to the vehicle according to the received second request, so that the vehicle Before entering the target tunnel, configure the luminous color of the vehicle's identification light group according to the color code.
  • the color codes obtained by different vehicles are different, so that the colors or the order of the colors presented by the identification lamp groups on different vehicles are different. In other words, the color codes obtained by each vehicle are unique.
  • the vehicle does not need to request the server to assign a color code
  • the color code of the vehicle's identification light group can also be preset when the vehicle leaves the factory, and the color code of each vehicle is unique.
  • the vehicle can set the luminous color of each indicator light in the indicator light group according to the color code.
  • the so-called color coding refers to the mixing ratio (r, g, b) of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in the RGB color space of the light source, which identifies each of the lamp groups
  • the identification lights have their corresponding color codes, and the vehicle sets the mixing ratio of the three primary colors in the identification lights through the color coding to obtain the preset luminous color. For example, if the color code of a certain indicator light is (255,0,0), it means that the green component and the blue component are both 0, and the red component reaches the maximum value. After the color code is set, the indicator light will display Red light.
  • the server receives the second environment image sent by the Ki-th camera, the second environment image includes the image of the identification light group on the vehicle, that is, after the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the camera in the target tunnel will collect The image of the vehicle driving under the current view, and the collected image is sent to the server for processing.
  • the second environment image is generally an RGB color image or a visible light image.
  • Fig. 14A exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of the positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel, and Fig. 14A only exemplarily shows a set of corresponding cameras and positioning gratings.
  • the Ki-th camera and the Ki-th positioning grating are at different heights at the same position, that is, from the side view shown in Figure 14A, the Ki-th positioning
  • the grating and the Ki-th camera are located on the same straight line perpendicular to the ground.
  • the camera is installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, and the positioning grating is installed on the side wall of the tunnel.
  • the camera is used to collect images containing the identification lights on the vehicle.
  • the positioning grating can also be installed in front of or behind the corresponding camera, but the difference between the positions of the two should be as small as possible.
  • S504 The server recognizes the identification light group of the vehicle according to the second environment image, and determines the third distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the server needs to first recognize and analyze the color of the identification light group on the vehicle in the second environmental image through the image processing algorithm, and according to the recognition Calculate the fourth distance from the Ki-th camera to the vehicle where the identification light group is located (as shown in Figure 14A); on the other hand, the server combines the ground height and the fourth distance of the Ki-th camera to obtain The third distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th positioning grating (see Figure 14A).
  • the fourth distance refers to the spatial distance between the vehicle where the identification light group is located and the Ki-th camera
  • the third distance refers to the distance between the vehicle where the identification light group is located and the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the third The distance is the distance from the vertical plane of the vehicle where the identification light group is located, and the vertical plane is the plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle where the Ki-th positioning grating is located.
  • the server can obtain the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th camera by using an image processing algorithm or a target detection algorithm to identify the indicator light based on the shape of the vehicle’s indicator light group (for example, rectangle or ellipse, etc.)
  • the analysis result is the color code corresponding to the identification light group by analyzing the color of the identified identification light group, and the analysis result indicates the color and arrangement order of the identification light group of the vehicle; server identification After the identification lamp group of the vehicle is obtained, the pixel position of the identification lamp group in the second environment image and the size of the identification lamp group in the second environment image can be obtained, combined with the actual size information of the identification lamp group, then Determine the distance between the identification light group and the Ki-th camera, and this distance is also approximately equal to the fourth distance between the vehicle where the identification light group is located and the Ki-th camera.
  • the vehicle After determining the fourth distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th camera, combining the ground height of the Ki-th camera (pre-stored in the server) and the ground height of the vehicle's identification light group, the vehicle can be calculated according to the Pythagorean theorem The third distance from the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the server may also combine the pitch angle of the Ki-th camera when shooting the identification light group to obtain the Ki-th vehicle distance.
  • the third distance of the positioning grating may also combine the pitch angle of the Ki-th camera when shooting the identification light group to obtain the Ki-th vehicle distance.
  • the Ki-th positioning grating and the Ki-th camera are located at different heights at similar positions, that is, the two can be installed one after the other. Take Figure 14B as an example, as shown in Figure 14B. In this case, the Ki-th camera is closer to the vehicle equipped with the identification light group than the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the Ki-th positioning grating and the Ki-th camera are no longer Located on the same straight line perpendicular to the ground, when the server calculates the third distance between the vehicle in which the identification light group is located and the Ki-th positioning grating, in addition to the fourth distance shown in Figure 14B, the identification light group and the Ki-th
  • the server calculates the third distance between the vehicle in which the identification light group is located and the Ki-th positioning grating, in addition to the fourth distance shown in Figure 14B, the identification light group and the Ki-th
  • the vertical height difference between the cameras that can be obtained from the ground clearance of the marking light group and the height of the Ki-th marking light group
  • the way to obtain the ground clearance of the vehicle's identification light group can be as follows: if the color code of the vehicle's identification light group is assigned by the server, then the second request sent by the vehicle to the server also carries There is the ground clearance of the identification light group on the vehicle; if the color code of the identification light group of the vehicle is preset when the vehicle leaves the factory, the vehicle needs to send the first information to the server before entering the tunnel.
  • the first information includes The color code of the identification light group of the vehicle and the ground height of the identification light group on the vehicle, and the first information is used to instruct the server to establish a mapping relationship table between the color code and the corresponding ground height.
  • the server After the server obtains the analysis result of the color of the identification light group of the vehicle according to the second environment image, it can search the color code-ground height mapping table according to the analysis result to obtain the ground height of the corresponding identification light group. It should be noted that if the color code of the identification light group of the vehicle is preset when the vehicle leaves the factory, and the camera can directly process the collected second environment image (for example, identify the identification light group, calculate the third distance, etc. ), the vehicle can also directly send the first information to the camera before entering the tunnel.
  • the analysis result obtained by analyzing the color of the identified identification lamp group can be characterized by the value of the R, G, and B three channels of each color in the identification lamp group in the RGB color space, or each color in the HSV color space
  • the value of each color channel in the HSL color space or other color spaces is not limited in this application.
  • the color space corresponding to the analysis result needs to be consistent with the color space corresponding to the color code of the vehicle's identification light group.
  • S505 The server judges whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the third distance.
  • the server after obtaining the third distance of the vehicle from the Ki-th positioning grating, the server compares the third distance with a preset threshold. When the third distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, the server can determine the vehicle It is located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating; when the third distance is greater than the preset threshold, the server may determine that the vehicle is not located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the preset threshold value may be 1 meter, 1.5 meters, 2.5 meters, 3 meters or other values, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the server determines that a vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, the server also needs to record the analysis result of the color of the vehicle's identification light group.
  • the analysis result indicates the color and the color of each identification light in the identification light group. order.
  • S503-S505 are exemplary descriptions of a method for the server to monitor whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • cameras in each area of the tunnel may directly monitor whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of its corresponding positioning grating without the participation of the server.
  • the third distance is less than or equal to the preset range, it means that the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, and at the same time record the marking lights on the vehicle.
  • This analysis result indicates the color and order of the identification light group on the vehicle.
  • the server or the camera processes the second environment image
  • multiple vehicles may drive side by side. After the second environment image is processed, it is found that there are vehicles on multiple lanes located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating at the same time, then the colors of the identification light groups of these vehicles are sequentially analyzed and the multiple analysis results obtained are recorded.
  • the server when the server determines that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, the server sends out second broadcast information.
  • the second broadcast information carries instruction information, and the instruction information indicates one or more identifiers.
  • the color and sequence of the lights Since one identification light group includes at least one identification light, the indication information is also equivalent to indicating the color and sequence of the identification light group on the vehicle.
  • the second broadcast information is used to instruct the vehicle to determine whether it is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the second broadcast information.
  • the Ki-th camera can directly send out the second broadcast information.
  • the second broadcast information indicates the color and sequence of the identification light group on the vehicle, so that the vehicle can judge whether it is in the Ki-th according to the second broadcast information.
  • the second broadcast information carries The indication information of indicates the color and sequence of at least one identification light group, which are the identification light groups of multiple vehicles located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • the vehicle receives the second broadcast information, and determines whether it is within a preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the second broadcast information.
  • the vehicle determines whether it is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the second broadcast information. Specifically, the vehicle matches the identification light group on its own vehicle according to the color and sequence of the identification lights in the identification light group indicated in the second broadcast information, that is, compares the color code carried in the second broadcast information with that of the vehicle's own identification light group.
  • the matching is successful, indicating that the vehicle is or belongs to the vehicle where the identification light group indicated by the second broadcast information is located, that is, the vehicle is currently within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating; if not If they are the same, the matching fails, indicating that the vehicle is not currently located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating.
  • S508 When the Ki-th positioning grating is triggered, the Ki-th positioning grating sends out the first broadcast information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S103 in the embodiment of FIG. 3, which will not be repeated here. It should be noted that the Ki-th positioning grating is the positioning system in S103.
  • the vehicle receives the first broadcast information, and when the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, obtains the position information of the Ki-th positioning grating in the map, and locates the vehicle on the map according to the position information.
  • the position information of the Ki-th positioning grating in the map For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S204 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
  • S510 Before the vehicle triggers the next positioning grating, the vehicle's motion information is acquired, and the vehicle is navigated on the map according to the vehicle's position information and the motion information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S205 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
  • positioning gratings and cameras are set in the tunnel to assist the vehicle to achieve precise positioning in the tunnel.
  • the camera determines the vehicle and the The positional relationship of the positioning grating corresponding to the identification light group, combined with the trigger information from the positioning grating, can realize the precise positioning of the vehicle in the tunnel, which effectively solves the problem that the vehicle cannot be in the tunnel or underground where the satellite signal is blocked or shielded.
  • the problem of positioning or inaccurate positioning improves the robustness of vehicle positioning and reduces the construction cost of vehicle positioning in a semi-enclosed space with poor signal.
  • Vehicle A and Vehicle B are driving in a tunnel. Both Vehicle A and Vehicle B are equipped with an identification light group. The color and sequence of identification light group A are different from the color and sequence of identification light group B. Vehicle A and Vehicle B has passed the first positioning grating and is approaching the second positioning grating. The second camera in the tunnel collects the image of the identification lamp group on the vehicle at this angle of view, and sends the collected image of the identification lamp group to the server. The server processes the received image and monitors that the distance from vehicle A is the second The distance of the two positioning gratings is equal to the preset threshold, which means that the vehicle A is currently located within the preset range of the second positioning grating.
  • the server sends out broadcast information indicating the identification light group A and the camera number 2.
  • vehicle A After receiving the broadcast information, vehicle A matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group A. If the matching is successful, then vehicle A can determine that it is in the preset position of the second positioning grating. Set within the range, so vehicle A obtains the position coordinates (B2, L2, H2) of the second positioning grating in the WGS84 coordinate system on the map and updates it to its current position coordinates, and displays it on the vehicle's display screen.
  • vehicle B after receiving the broadcast information, vehicle B matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group B. The matching fails. Therefore, vehicle B can determine that it is not located in the second positioning grating. Within the preset range, therefore, the position coordinates displayed on the display screen of the vehicle B are (B, L, H), which has not been updated to the position coordinates of the second positioning grating.
  • Vehicle A and Vehicle B are driving in a tunnel. Both Vehicle A and Vehicle B are equipped with an identification light group. The color and sequence of the identification light group A are different from the color and sequence of the identification light group B. Vehicle A and Vehicle B has passed the first positioning grating and is approaching the second positioning grating. The second camera in the tunnel collects the image of the identification light group on the vehicle at this angle of view, and processes the collected image of the identification light group, and monitors that the vehicle A where the identification light group A is located is away from the second positioning grating. The distance is equal to the preset threshold, which means that vehicle A is currently within the preset range of the second positioning grating. Therefore, the second camera sends out broadcast information indicating the identification light group A and camera number 2.
  • vehicle A After receiving the broadcast information, vehicle A matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group A. If the matching is successful, then vehicle A can determine that it is in the preset position of the second positioning grating. Set the range, so vehicle A obtains the position coordinates (B2, L2, H2) of the second positioning grating in the WGS84 coordinate system on the map and updates it to its current position coordinates and displays it on the vehicle's display screen.
  • vehicle B after receiving the broadcast information, vehicle B matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group B. The matching fails. Therefore, vehicle B can determine that it is not located in the second positioning grating. Within the preset range, therefore, the position coordinates displayed on the display screen of the vehicle B are (B, L, H), which has not been updated to the position coordinates of the second positioning grating.
  • the device 30 at least includes a processor 110, a memory 111, a receiver 112, a transmitter 113, an image acquisition device 114, and an inertial measurement element 115.
  • the receiver 112 and the transmitter 113 can also be replaced with communication interfaces for providing information input and/or output for the processor 110.
  • the memory 111, the receiver 112, the transmitter 113, the image acquisition device 114, the inertial measurement element 115, and the processor 110 are connected or coupled via a bus.
  • the device 30 may be the vehicle in FIG. 1.
  • the receiver 112 is used to receive a map of a semi-enclosed space (for example, a tunnel) from the server/roadside unit/other vehicles, and the receiver 112 is also used to receive the first broadcast information sent when the positioning system (ie, positioning raster) is triggered .
  • the transmitter 113 is configured to send a first request to the server to obtain a map of the semi-enclosed space.
  • the receiver 112 and the transmitter 113 may include antennas and chipsets for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface.
  • the transmitter 113 and the transceiver 112 constitute a communication module.
  • the communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
  • protocols such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
  • the image acquisition device 114 is used to capture a first environment image in front of the vehicle, and the first environment image includes an image of a color device in a semi-enclosed space.
  • the image acquisition device 114 includes a camera, and may also include one or more of a depth sensor, an RGB image sensor, or a structured light image sensor.
  • the image acquisition device 114 may be a video camera, a camera, or other devices with an image acquisition function.
  • the inertial measurement element 115 is used to obtain movement information of the vehicle, for example, the speed, acceleration, and movement direction of the vehicle, so that the processor 110 can navigate according to the information obtained by the inertial measurement element 115.
  • the inertial measurement element 115 includes an accelerometer and a gyroscope, where the accelerometer is used to measure the current acceleration of the vehicle, and the gyroscope is used to detect the direction and speed of the vehicle's movement.
  • the specific implementation of each operation performed by the processor 110 may refer to specific operations such as identifying the color device in the first environment image, calculating the first distance of the vehicle distance positioning system, and positioning the vehicle in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the processor 110 may be composed of one or more general-purpose processors, such as a central processing unit (CPU), or a combination of a CPU and a hardware chip.
  • the aforementioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (Programmable Logic Device, PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • the above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device, CPLD), a field programmable logic gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), a general array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • GAL General array logic
  • the memory 111 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 111 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 111 may also include a combination of the above types.
  • the memory 111 can store programs and data.
  • the stored programs include target recognition programs, color analysis programs, inertial navigation programs, etc., and the stored data includes: semi-enclosed space maps, color devices (for example, identification light groups) analysis Results, vehicle movement information, etc.
  • the memory 111 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 110.
  • the device 30 is used to implement the method on the vehicle side described in the embodiment in FIG. 4.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of another device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 40 at least includes a processor 210, a memory 211, a receiver 212, a transmitter 213, a color device 214, and an inertial measurement element 215.
  • the receiver 212 and the transmitter 213 can also be replaced with communication interfaces for providing information input and/or output for the processor 210.
  • the memory 211, the receiver 212, the transmitter 213, the inertial measurement element 215, and the processor 210 are connected or coupled via a bus.
  • the device 40 may be the vehicle in FIGS. 2 and 3.
  • the transmitter 213 is used to send a first request to the server to obtain a map of the semi-enclosed space.
  • the transmitter 214 is also used to send first information to the server.
  • the first information carries the color of the device 40.
  • the receiver 212 is used for receiving the map of the semi-enclosed space sent by the server, and the receiver 212 is also used for receiving the second broadcast information and the first broadcast information from the positioning system (eg, positioning raster).
  • the receiver 212 may also receive a semi-enclosed space map sent from other vehicles or roadside units.
  • the receiver 212 and the transmitter 213 may include antennas and chipsets for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface.
  • the transmitter 213 and the transceiver 212 constitute a communication module, and the communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
  • protocols for example, protocols
  • the color device 214 is used for shooting by an image acquisition device (for example, a camera) in a semi-enclosed space to obtain an image of the color device 214 on the vehicle.
  • the color device 214 may be one or more identification lights or other colored light-emitting devices, and may also be a colored metal plate or other colored devices.
  • the inertial measurement element 215 is used to obtain movement information of the vehicle, for example, the speed, acceleration, and movement direction of the vehicle, so that the processor 210 can navigate according to the information obtained by the inertial measurement element 215.
  • the inertial measurement element 215 includes an accelerometer and a gyroscope, where the accelerometer is used to measure the current acceleration of the vehicle, and the gyroscope is used to detect the direction and speed of the vehicle's movement.
  • the specific implementation of each operation performed by the processor 210 may refer to specific operations such as determining whether it is within the preset range of the positioning grating according to the second broadcast information in the foregoing method embodiment, positioning the vehicle, and navigating the vehicle.
  • the processor 210 may be composed of one or more general-purpose processors, such as a central processing unit (CPU), or a combination of a CPU and a hardware chip.
  • the aforementioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (Programmable Logic Device, PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • the above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device, CPLD), a field programmable logic gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), a general array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • GAL General array logic
  • the memory 211 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 211 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 211 may also include a combination of the above types.
  • the memory 211 can store programs and data.
  • the stored programs include color device matching programs, inertial navigation programs, etc.
  • the stored data includes: semi-enclosed space maps, color devices (for example, identification light groups) color coding, vehicle Sports information, etc.
  • the memory 211 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 210.
  • the device 40 is used to implement the method on the vehicle side described in the embodiment in FIG. 13.
  • the device 50 includes at least a processor 310, a memory 311, a receiver 312, and a transmitter 313.
  • the receiver 312 and the transmitter 313 can also be replaced It is a communication interface for providing information input and/or output for the processor 310.
  • the memory 311, the receiver 312, the transmitter 313, and the processor 310 are connected or coupled through a bus.
  • the device 50 may be the server in FIG. 2 or the camera in FIG. 3.
  • the device 50 further includes a camera 314 for collecting images of the color device 214 of the device 40, and the camera 314 is connected or coupled to the processor 310, the receiver 312, etc. through a bus .
  • the receiver 312 is also used to receive the first information sent by the device 40.
  • the first information carries the color code of the color device 214 of the device 40 and the height of the color device 214 from the ground.
  • the receiver 312 is also used to receive the captured image of the color device 214 of the device 40 sent by the camera in FIG. 2.
  • the receiver 312 is also used to receive the device 30 or the first request sent by the device 40, the first request is used to instruct the device 50 to send a map of the semi-enclosed space.
  • the receiver 312 is also used to obtain the image of the color device 214 collected by the camera 314 for processing by the processor 310.
  • the transmitter 313 is used to send second broadcast information to the device 40.
  • the instruction information carried in the second broadcast information indicates the color and sequence of the color devices on the vehicle within the preset range of the positioning grating, so that the device 40 can follow the second broadcast
  • the information determines whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system (eg, positioning grating).
  • the transmitter 313 is also used to send a map of the semi-enclosed space to the device 30 or the device 40.
  • the receiver 312 and the transmitter 313 may include antennas and chipsets for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface.
  • the transmitter 313 and the transceiver 312 constitute a communication module, and the communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
  • protocols for example, protocols
  • the memory 311 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 311 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 311 may also include a combination of the above types.
  • the memory 311 can store programs and data.
  • the stored programs include target recognition algorithms, color analysis programs, etc.
  • the stored data includes maps in a semi-enclosed space, color codes for color devices (for example, identification light groups), and camera
  • the memory 311 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 310.
  • the processor 310 is composed of one or more general-purpose processors, such as a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU), a microprocessor (Microcontroller Unit, MCU), or a CPU, GPU, Combination of MCU and hardware chip.
  • the aforementioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (Programmable Logic Device, PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device, CPLD), a field programmable logic gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), a general array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • the processor 310 is configured to call the programs and data in the memory 310 to realize the recognition of the color device 214 of the device 40 in the second environment image, the analysis of the color of the color device 214, and the determination of whether the device 40 is in the preset range of the positioning system in the above embodiment. Inside and other specific operations.
  • the device 50 is used to implement the server-side method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a monitoring device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the monitoring device 60 at least includes a processor 410, a memory 411, and a receiver 412.
  • the receiver 412 can also be replaced with a communication interface for providing information input for the processor 410.
  • the memory 411, the receiver 412, and the processor 410 are connected or coupled through a bus.
  • the monitoring device 60 can be integrated in the image acquisition device 114 or the processor 110 of the device 30, or can exist independently in the device 30, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the corresponding vehicle positioning scene is: an image acquisition device (for example, a camera) is set on the vehicle, a one-to-one corresponding color device and a positioning device are set in a semi-enclosed space, and the monitoring device 60 can be integrated into the image acquisition device of the vehicle , Can also be integrated in the vehicle and exist independently of the image acquisition device.
  • the monitoring device 60 may be integrated in the image acquisition device 114 of the device 30, or may be integrated in the processor 110 of the device 30, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the receiver 412 is used to obtain an environmental image including a color device.
  • the environmental image may be captured by the image capture device 114 of the device 30.
  • the receiver 412 may include a device for capturing images in the vehicle directly or through an air interface. Antenna and chipset for device communication.
  • the processor 410 is composed of one or more general-purpose processors and/or special-purpose processors. Specifically, the processor 410 may be one of a central processing unit, a microprocessor, a single-chip computer, a digital signal processor, an image processor, etc. Multiple.
  • the processor 410 calls the data and programs in the memory 411 to obtain the horizontal distance between the color device and the image capture device according to the environmental image and the positional relationship between the image capture device that captures the environmental image and the color device, and according to the horizontal distance It is determined whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device in the semi-enclosed space, so that the vehicle can realize positioning according to the position information of the positioning device when it is determined that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device.
  • the memory 411 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 411 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 411 may also include a combination of the above types.
  • the memory 411 can store programs and data.
  • the stored programs include color analysis algorithms, target detection algorithms, etc.
  • the stored data includes: color coding of color devices-ground clearance mapping information, ground clearance of image acquisition devices, color The image of the device, the analysis result of the color device, various distances (for example, the distance between the color device and the camera, the horizontal distance between the color device and the image capture device, the vertical height difference between the color device and the image capture device, etc.).
  • the memory 411 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 410.
  • the monitoring device 60 further includes a transmitter 413, and the transmitter 413 may also be replaced with a communication interface for providing information output for the processor 410.
  • the transmitter 413 is connected or coupled with the memory 411, the receiver 412, and the processor 410 through a bus.
  • the monitoring device 60 can be integrated in the device 50.
  • the corresponding vehicle positioning scenario is: a color device is set on the vehicle, a corresponding image acquisition device and positioning device are set in a semi-enclosed space, and the monitoring device 60 can be integrated into an image acquisition device or a server in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the transmitter 413 is used for sending out second broadcast information when the processor 410 determines that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device.
  • the second broadcast information indicates the color device on the vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning device.
  • the color and sequence of the positioning device so that when the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information, it performs positioning according to the position information of the positioning device.
  • the transmitter 413 may include an antenna and chipset for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface.
  • the receiver 412 and the transmitter 413 constitute a communication module, and the communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
  • protocols for example, protocols
  • protocols such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
  • the receiver 412 is used to obtain the environmental image containing the color device means that the receiver 412 receives the environmental image containing the color device sent by the image acquisition device set in a semi-enclosed space .
  • the receiver 412 may include an antenna and chipset for communicating with an image capture device in a semi-enclosed space directly or through an air interface.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 32 includes a monitoring unit 320, an obtaining unit 321, and a positioning unit 322.
  • the device 32 can be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the device 32 may be the vehicle in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2.
  • the monitoring unit 320 is used to monitor whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space; the acquisition unit 321 is used to monitor whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space Next, obtain the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map; the positioning unit 322 is configured to locate the vehicle on the map according to the position information.
  • the functional modules of the device 32 can be used to implement the vehicle-side method described in the embodiment in FIG. 6, that is, the device 32 is the vehicle in FIG. 1.
  • the device 32 further includes a collection unit 323 for collecting images of the color device arranged in the semi-enclosed space.
  • the acquisition unit 321 can be used to perform S301, S302, and S306, the collection unit 323 can be used to perform S303, the monitoring unit 320 can be used to perform S304 and S305, and the positioning unit 322 can be used to perform S307 and S308.
  • the functional modules of the device 32 can also be used to implement the vehicle-side method described in the embodiment in FIG. 13, that is, the device 52 is the vehicle in FIG. 2.
  • the acquiring unit 321 can be used to perform S501 and S502
  • the monitoring unit 320 can be used to perform S507
  • the positioning unit 322 can be used to perform S509 and S510.
  • the functional modules of the device 32 can also be used to execute the method on the vehicle side in FIG. 4 and FIG.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 52 includes a monitoring unit 520, a broadcasting unit 521, and an acquiring unit 522.
  • the device 52 can be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the device 52 may be the server in FIG. 2.
  • the monitoring unit 520 after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, monitors whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space; the broadcasting unit 521 is used to monitor the situation that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system Next, the second broadcast information is sent, and the second broadcast information is used to indicate that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system, so that the vehicle can locate according to the position information of the positioning system.
  • the functional modules of the device 32 can be used to implement the server-side method described in the embodiment of FIG. 13.
  • the obtaining unit 522 can be used to perform S503
  • the monitoring unit 520 can be used to perform S504 and S505.
  • 521 can be used to execute S506.
  • the device 52 may also be the camera in FIG. 3.
  • the server in FIG. 13 may be replaced by an image acquisition device (for example, a camera).
  • an image acquisition device for example, a camera
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 62 includes an obtaining unit 620 and a processing unit 621.
  • the device 62 may be integrated in the camera of the vehicle in FIG. 1 or in the vehicle in FIG. 1 and exist independently of the camera.
  • the device 62 further includes a broadcasting unit 622.
  • the device 62 may be integrated into the server in FIG. 2 or the camera set in the semi-enclosed space in FIG. 3.
  • the above-mentioned camera is only an example of an image acquisition device, and the camera can also be replaced by a camera or other image acquisition device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the device 62 can be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the acquisition unit 620 is used to acquire the environmental image collected by the image acquisition device, and the environmental image contains the image of the color device;
  • the processing unit 621 is used to determine the distance between the color device and the image acquisition device according to the environmental image; The positional relationship between the color device and the color device and the distance between the color device and the image capture device to determine the horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device; according to the horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device, it is determined when the vehicle enters After the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device in the semi-enclosed space, so that the vehicle can be positioned according to the position information of the positioning device; When the range is set, the second broadcast information is sent, so that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
  • the functional modules of the device 62 can be used to implement the method on the vehicle side described in the embodiment in FIG.
  • the functional modules of the device 62 can also be used to implement the server-side method described in the embodiment of FIG. 13.
  • the obtaining unit 620 can be used to perform S503
  • the processing unit 621 can be used to perform S504 and S505.
  • Unit 622 can be used to perform S506.
  • the functional modules of the device 62 can also be used to execute S101 in FIG. 4 and S202 in FIG.
  • Storage media include read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (RAM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable Read-only Memory, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory ( Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM), One-time Programmable Read-Only Memory (OTPROM), Electronically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM), CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory) or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage, tape storage, or any other computer-readable medium that can be used to carry or store data.
  • Read-Only Memory Read-Only Memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • PROM programmable read-only memory
  • PROM Programmable Read-only Memory
  • EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
  • OTPROM One-time Programmable Read-Only Memory
  • EEPROM Electronically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
  • CD-ROM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory
  • the technical solution of this application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions.
  • a device which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, a robot, a single-chip computer, a chip, a robot, etc.
  • a device which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, a robot, a single-chip computer, a chip, a robot, etc.

Abstract

A vehicle positioning method and a monitoring device, the method comprising: once a vehicle enters a semi-enclosed space, monitoring whether the vehicle is located within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space (S101); insofar as the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system, acquiring position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on a map (S102); and positioning the vehicle on the map according to the position information (S103). The method may accurately position vehicles in tunnels, parking lots and other spaces in which signals are weak, thus improving the robustness of vehicle positioning in spaces that have poor signals.

Description

一种车辆定位方法及装置Vehicle positioning method and device
本申请要求于2020年5月21日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010438125.8、发明名称为“一种车辆定位方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on May 21, 2020, the application number is 202010438125.8, and the invention title is "a vehicle positioning method and device", the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference .
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域以及车辆定位领域,尤其涉及一种车辆定位方法及装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology and vehicle positioning, and in particular to a vehicle positioning method and device.
背景技术Background technique
在车辆行驶的过程中,车辆位置是车辆导航以及规划控制的重要输入参数,能够实现对车辆位置的实时定位具有重要意义。通常情况下,车辆定位主要依赖于全球卫星导航系统(Global Navigation Satellite System,GNSS)以及惯性导航系统(Inertial Navigation System,INS),但在车辆处于隧道、地下停车场等信号较弱或有屏蔽、遮挡的场景下,由于无法接收到卫星信号导致无法对行驶车辆进行定位;若在此场景下车辆通过自身的惯性测量单元(Inertial Measurement Unit,IMU)计算自身的实时位置,但由于IMU的累积误差会随着时间显著增大,导致车辆的定位精度难以满足需求。During the driving of the vehicle, the vehicle position is an important input parameter for vehicle navigation and planning control, and it is of great significance to realize the real-time positioning of the vehicle position. Under normal circumstances, vehicle positioning mainly relies on Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) and Inertial Navigation System (INS), but when the vehicle is in a tunnel or underground parking lot, the signal is weak or shielded, In the occluded scenario, the vehicle cannot be positioned due to the inability to receive satellite signals; if in this scenario, the vehicle uses its own inertial measurement unit (IMU) to calculate its real-time position, but due to the cumulative error of the IMU It will increase significantly over time, causing the positioning accuracy of the vehicle to be difficult to meet the demand.
目前,已有一些替代方案欲解决例如隧道场景下的车辆定位问题,例如,利用隧道内环境亮度变化对车辆进行定位,但隧道中的环境亮度变化属于短周期变化,且光线由强到弱或由弱到强的变化是渐变的,因此识别转变点很容易出现识别或计算错误;还有些通过采用超宽带技术或者射频识别技术实现对隧道内的车辆的定位,但这些方法需要额外安装的硬件成本都很昂贵,批量布置的成本更高,除此之外,超宽带技术或射频识别技术都是基于电磁波的定位方案,在狭长的隧道中容易产生多路径效应,难以实现车辆的准确定位。At present, there are some alternative solutions to solve the problem of vehicle positioning in tunnel scenes, for example, the use of environmental brightness changes in the tunnel to locate vehicles, but the environmental brightness changes in the tunnel are short-period changes, and the light changes from strong to weak or The change from weak to strong is gradual, so identifying the transition point is prone to identification or calculation errors; some use ultra-wideband technology or radio frequency identification technology to locate vehicles in the tunnel, but these methods require additional hardware The cost is very expensive, and the cost of batch deployment is higher. In addition, ultra-wideband technology or radio frequency identification technology is a positioning solution based on electromagnetic waves, which is prone to multipath effects in long and narrow tunnels, and it is difficult to achieve accurate vehicle positioning.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例公开了一种车辆定位方法和装置,能够实现在卫星信号被遮挡或者屏蔽的隧道、地下停车场等空间下对车辆进行精确定位,且为车辆提供持续的定位能力,直至车辆离开卫星信号定位盲区。The embodiment of the application discloses a vehicle positioning method and device, which can realize accurate positioning of vehicles in tunnels, underground parking lots and other spaces where satellite signals are blocked or shielded, and provide continuous positioning capabilities for vehicles until the vehicle leaves Satellite signal positioning blind spot.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种车辆定位方法,所述方法包括:在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;在所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,获取地图中所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息;根据所述位置信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位。In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a vehicle positioning method. The method includes: after a vehicle enters a semi-enclosed space, monitoring whether the vehicle is within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space; When the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, obtain the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map; position.
本申请实施例中,车辆进入半封闭空间后,在车辆监测到自身位于半封闭空间中某定位系统的预设范围内时,则获取该定位系统在半封闭空间中的位置信息,并将该位置信息作为自身当前的位置信息结合半封闭空间的地图进行定位。In the embodiment of the present application, after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, when the vehicle detects that it is located within the preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space, it acquires the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space, and then The location information is used as its current location information combined with a semi-enclosed space map for positioning.
半封闭空间是指卫星信号因受到屏蔽或遮挡导致信号差或不稳定的空间。半封闭空间包括信号不佳的地下空间、信号不佳的地上空间。本申请实施例中,车辆可以是人类代步工具,也可以是物流运输工具,本申请实施例不做具体限定。Semi-enclosed space refers to a space in which satellite signals are shielded or obscured, resulting in poor or unstable signals. Semi-enclosed space includes underground space with poor signal and above ground space with poor signal. In the embodiment of the present application, the vehicle may be a human transportation tool or a logistics transportation tool, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可以看到,在设置有定位系统的半封闭空间中,车辆结合自身与定位系统的位置关系可以获得半封闭空间中定位系统对应的至少一个精确的位置信息,根据该位置信息和半封闭空间的地图可以实现车辆在半封闭空间中的准确定位,提升了车辆在信号不佳的半封闭空间中定位的鲁棒性,有效解决了半封闭空间中车辆难以准确定位的问题。It can be seen that in the semi-enclosed space provided with the positioning system, the vehicle can obtain at least one precise position information corresponding to the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space by combining the position relationship between itself and the positioning system. The map can realize the accurate positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space, improve the robustness of the vehicle positioning in the semi-enclosed space with poor signal, and effectively solve the problem that the vehicle is difficult to accurately locate in the semi-enclosed space.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述地图为所述车辆从服务器下载的,或者,所述地图为所述车辆从半封闭空间入口处的路侧单元处下载的,或者,所述地图为所述车辆从半封闭空间中的其他车辆处获得的。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a server, or the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a roadside unit at the entrance of a semi-enclosed space, or The map is obtained by the vehicle from other vehicles in the semi-enclosed space.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内,包括:确定所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第一距离;根据所述第一距离确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space includes: determining the first position between the vehicle and the positioning system Distance; determining whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the first distance.
本申请的一种实施例中,车辆可以通过监测自身距离定位系统的第一距离判断自身是否在该定位系统的预设范围内,在第一距离小于等于预设阈值时,则该车辆位于该定位系统的预设范围内。In an embodiment of the present application, the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by monitoring its first distance from the positioning system. When the first distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, the vehicle is located in the Within the preset range of the positioning system.
可以看到,当车辆确定自身是位于某定位系统的预设范围内时,车辆才会获取该定位系统的位置信息,从而根据该定位系统的位置信息实现车辆在半封闭空间的定位,提高了车辆定位过程中的处理效率,节省了车辆的计算资源。It can be seen that when the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of a positioning system, the vehicle will obtain the position information of the positioning system, so as to realize the positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space according to the position information of the positioning system, which improves The processing efficiency in the vehicle positioning process saves the computing resources of the vehicle.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位系统包括第一颜色装置和定位装置,所述地图还包括指示所述第一颜色装置的离地高度的信息;所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发第一广播信息;所述确定所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第一距离,包括:拍摄第一环境图像,所述第一环境图像包含所述第一颜色装置的图像;根据所述第一环境图像确定所述车辆与所述第一颜色装置之间的第二距离;根据所述第二距离和所述第一颜色装置的离地高度,获得所述第一距离。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, the map further includes information indicating the height of the first color device from the ground; the positioning device is used for Triggering first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; the determining the first distance between the vehicle and the positioning system includes: taking a first environment image, the first environment image including The image of the first color device; determine the second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image; according to the second distance and the ground clearance of the first color device Height, the first distance is obtained.
其中,第一距离为图像采集装置所在的车辆距离垂直平面的距离,垂直平面为定位装置所在的与车辆行驶方向垂直的平面;第二距离为指图像采集装置所在的车辆与半封闭空间中某颜色装置之间的空间距离。Among them, the first distance is the distance between the vehicle where the image capture device is located and the vertical plane, and the vertical plane is the plane perpendicular to the direction of the vehicle where the positioning device is located; the second distance refers to the vehicle where the image capture device is located and a certain semi-enclosed space. The spatial distance between color devices.
本申请的另一种实施例中,在车辆通过处理第一环境图像获得其自身与颜色装置之间的第二距离后,车辆获得第一距离的方式还可以是:根据第二距离和车辆的图像采集装置拍摄第一颜色装置时的俯仰角,获得所述第一距离。In another embodiment of the present application, after the vehicle obtains the second distance between itself and the color device by processing the first environment image, the vehicle obtains the first distance according to the second distance and the vehicle’s The pitch angle when the image acquisition device photographs the first color device to obtain the first distance.
可以看到,车辆结合计算机视觉处理技术处理包含颜色装置的第一环境图像来确定自身是否在定位系统的预设范围内,这种方式不受半封闭空间中卫星信号屏蔽等环境因素的影响。It can be seen that the vehicle combines the computer vision processing technology to process the first environmental image containing the color device to determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system. This method is not affected by environmental factors such as satellite signal shielding in a semi-enclosed space.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位系统包括第一颜色装置和定位装置,所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发第一广播信息;所述第一广播信息包括所述定位装置的位置信息;所述获取地图中所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息,包括:根据所述定位装置发送的第一广播信息获得所述定位装置的位置信息;根据所述定位装置的位置信息确定所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, and the positioning device is used to trigger the first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; The first broadcast information includes the location information of the positioning device; the obtaining the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map includes: obtaining the location according to the first broadcast information sent by the positioning device The location information of the device; the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space is determined according to the location information of the positioning device.
本申请的一种实施例中,第一广播信息包括定位装置的位置信息和该定位装置的编号,在地图包含多个定位系统的编号时,位于该定位装置的预设范围内的车辆可通过第一广播 信息中的编号和定位装置的位置信息结合地图获得该定位装置所在的定位系统的位置信息。In an embodiment of the present application, the first broadcast information includes the position information of the positioning device and the number of the positioning device. When the map contains the numbers of multiple positioning systems, vehicles located within the preset range of the positioning device can pass The number in the first broadcast information and the position information of the positioning device are combined with the map to obtain the position information of the positioning system where the positioning device is located.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第一广播信息包括触发时刻和所述定位装置的位置信息,所述触发时刻用于指示所述定位装置被所述车辆触发的时刻,所述根据所述位置信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位,包括:根据所述位置信息和所述触发时刻在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the first broadcast information includes a trigger moment and location information of the positioning device, and the trigger moment is used to indicate the moment when the positioning device is triggered by the vehicle. The positioning the vehicle on the map according to the location information includes: positioning the vehicle on the map according to the location information and the trigger time.
本申请实施例中,定位系统除了可以在自身被车辆触发时立即发送第一广播信息外,还可以在自身被触发后的一段时间再发送第一广播信息。第一广播信息的发送时刻和车辆接收到第一广播信息的时刻之间的时延可忽略不计。In the embodiment of the present application, in addition to sending the first broadcast information immediately when the positioning system is triggered by the vehicle, the positioning system may also send the first broadcast information after a period of time after being triggered. The time delay between the time when the first broadcast information is sent and the time when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information is negligible.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述根据所述第一环境图像确定所述车辆与所述第一颜色装置之间的第二距离,包括:从所述第一环境图像中识别出所述第一颜色装置;根据所述第一颜色装置的图像确定所述第二距离。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the determining the second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image includes: identifying from the first environment image Out the first color device; determine the second distance according to the image of the first color device.
本申请的一种实施例中,车辆识别出颜色装置后获得第一颜色装置在第一环境图像中的像素位置以及尺寸大小,根据第一颜色装置在第一环境图像中的像素位置、尺寸大小以及地图中第一颜色装置的实际尺寸信息,确定车辆距离第一颜色装置的第二距离。In an embodiment of the present application, after the vehicle recognizes the color device, the pixel position and size of the first color device in the first environmental image are obtained, according to the pixel position and size of the first color device in the first environmental image And the actual size information of the first color device in the map to determine the second distance between the vehicle and the first color device.
可以看到,车辆结合计算机视觉处理技术识别定位系统中定位装置对应的颜色装置来确定车辆距离颜色装置的第二距离,从而确定车辆距离该颜色装置对应的定位装置的第一距离,这种方式不受半封闭空间中卫星信号屏蔽的影响,且由于半封闭空间的光照环境稳定,能提高车辆识别颜色装置的准确性。It can be seen that the vehicle combines the computer vision processing technology to identify the color device corresponding to the positioning device in the positioning system to determine the second distance from the vehicle to the color device, thereby determining the first distance from the vehicle to the positioning device corresponding to the color device. It is not affected by the shielding of satellite signals in a semi-enclosed space, and because the light environment in the semi-enclosed space is stable, the accuracy of the vehicle identification color device can be improved.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第一颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述从所述第一环境图像中识别出所述第一颜色装置,包括:通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述第一颜色装置。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the first color device includes one or more identification lights; the recognizing the first color device from the first environment image includes: The color and sequence of the one or more identification lights are used to identify the first color device.
本申请的一种实施例中,在半封闭空间设置有多个颜色装置时,这多个颜色装置被间隔设置在半封闭空间中的不同位置处,且不同位置处的颜色装置具有不同的颜色或不同颜色的排列组合,以降低识别颜色装置的误码率。In an embodiment of the present application, when multiple color devices are provided in a semi-closed space, the multiple color devices are arranged at different positions in the semi-closed space at intervals, and the color devices at different positions have different colors Or the permutation and combination of different colors to reduce the bit error rate of the color recognition device.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位装置包括定位光栅或地磁感应器。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述方法还包括:在所述车辆不位于所述定位系统的预设范围内时,丢弃所述第一广播信息。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the method further includes: discarding the first broadcast information when the vehicle is not within a preset range of the positioning system.
本申请的一种实施例中,车辆接收到来自某定位系统的第一广播信息时,若车辆确定自身不位于定位系统的预设范围内,车辆可直接丢弃第一广播信息,以节省车辆侧的计算资源,提高车辆在半封闭空间中的定位效率。In an embodiment of the present application, when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information from a positioning system, if the vehicle determines that it is not within the preset range of the positioning system, the vehicle can directly discard the first broadcast information to save the vehicle side. Computing resources to improve the positioning efficiency of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内,包括:接收第二广播信息,所述第二广播信息用于指示位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的车辆;根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the monitoring whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space includes: receiving second broadcast information, where the second broadcast information is used for Indicate a vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning system; determine whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information.
本申请实施例中,监测车辆是否位于定位系统的预设范围内的任务可由服务器或者位于半封闭空间中的图像采集装置执行。因此,上述接收第二广播信息可以是接收服务器发送的第二广播信息或者接收位于半封闭空间中的图像采集装置发送的第二广播信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the task of monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system can be performed by the server or the image acquisition device located in the semi-enclosed space. Therefore, the above-mentioned receiving second broadcast information may be receiving the second broadcast information sent by the server or receiving the second broadcast information sent by the image capture device located in the semi-enclosed space.
本申请的一种实施例中,在半封闭空间设置有多个定位定位系统时,第二广播信息还包括所述定位系统的编号,以使车辆可以根据接收到的第二广播信息确定自身是否在该定位系统的预设范围内。第二广播信息承载于广播信道中。In an embodiment of the present application, when multiple positioning and positioning systems are installed in a semi-enclosed space, the second broadcast information further includes the number of the positioning system, so that the vehicle can determine whether it is itself based on the received second broadcast information. Within the preset range of the positioning system. The second broadcast information is carried in the broadcast channel.
可以看到,车辆只需接收指示了位于某定位系统的预设范围内的车辆的第二广播信息,然后匹配自身是否为第二广播信息中指示的车辆,即可确定车辆自身是否在该定位系统的预设范围内。节省了车辆侧的计算资源,提高了车辆在半封闭空间中的定位效率。It can be seen that the vehicle only needs to receive the second broadcast information indicating the vehicle within the preset range of a certain positioning system, and then match whether it is the vehicle indicated in the second broadcast information, and then it can determine whether the vehicle itself is in the location. Within the preset range of the system. The computing resources on the vehicle side are saved, and the positioning efficiency of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space is improved.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,所述车辆设置有第二颜色装置,所述第二颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述第二广播信息携带指示信息,所述指示信息指示了一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序;所述根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内,包括:根据所述第二广播信息指示的一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序是否与所述第二颜色装置匹配,来确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, the vehicle is provided with a second color device, and the second color device includes one or more identification lights; the second broadcast information carries instruction information, the instruction information Indicates the color and sequence of one or more identification lights; the determining whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space according to the second broadcast information includes: according to the second broadcast Whether the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights indicated by the information matches the second color device to determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system.
本申请的一种实施例中,半封闭空间设置有多个定位系统,每个定位系统包含定位装置和图像采集装置,颜色装置设置于车辆上,且不同车辆上的颜色装置的颜色或颜色排列组合不同。In an embodiment of the present application, a semi-enclosed space is provided with multiple positioning systems, each positioning system includes a positioning device and an image acquisition device, the color device is set on the vehicle, and the color or color arrangement of the color device on different vehicles The combination is different.
本申请的一种实施例中,在半封闭空间设置有多个并行车道的情况下,第二广播信息中携带的指示信息指示了至少一个颜色装置的颜色和顺序,且上述至少一个颜色装置为位于该定位系统的预设范围内的多辆车的颜色装置,在车辆自身的颜色装置与第二广播信息中指示的颜色装置中的一个匹配成功时,该车辆位于此定位系统的预设范围内。In an embodiment of the present application, when multiple parallel lanes are provided in a semi-enclosed space, the indication information carried in the second broadcast information indicates the color and sequence of at least one color device, and the above-mentioned at least one color device is The color devices of multiple vehicles located within the preset range of the positioning system, when the color device of the vehicle itself is successfully matched with one of the color devices indicated in the second broadcast information, the vehicle is located in the preset range of the positioning system Inside.
基于第一方面,在可能的实施例中,在所述根据所述位置信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位之后,所述方法还包括:获取所述车辆的运动信息;根据所述车辆的位置信息和所述车辆的运动信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行导航。Based on the first aspect, in a possible embodiment, after the positioning of the vehicle on the map according to the location information, the method further includes: acquiring movement information of the vehicle; The location information of the vehicle and the movement information of the vehicle navigate the vehicle in the map.
本申请实施例中,车辆结合车辆当前的位置信息和车辆的运动信息利用惯性导航技术对车辆进行导航,从而获得车辆行驶过程中在半封闭空间中的实时位置。在车辆触发下一个定位系统时,将被触发的定位系统的位置信息更新为车辆当前的位置信息,从而实现了车辆在半封闭空间中的精确定位。In the embodiments of the present application, the vehicle combines the current position information of the vehicle and the movement information of the vehicle to use the inertial navigation technology to navigate the vehicle, so as to obtain the real-time position of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space during the driving process. When the vehicle triggers the next positioning system, the position information of the triggered positioning system is updated to the current position information of the vehicle, thereby realizing the precise positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space.
本申请实施例中,半封闭空间中设置的多个定位系统将半封闭空间分成多个小段,以使车辆在每个小段行驶的时间相较于在整个半封闭空间中的行驶时间大大减少,因此,车辆在每个小段中因惯性导航累积的误差可忽略不计,提高了车辆定位的准确性。In the embodiment of the present application, the multiple positioning systems provided in the semi-enclosed space divide the semi-enclosed space into multiple small sections, so that the driving time of the vehicle in each small section is greatly reduced compared with the driving time in the entire semi-closed space. Therefore, the error accumulated by the inertial navigation of the vehicle in each segment is negligible, which improves the accuracy of vehicle positioning.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种车辆定位方法,该方法包括:在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;在监测到所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,发送第二广播信息,所述第二广播信息用于指示所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内,以便于所述车辆根据所述定位系统的位置信息进行定位。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a vehicle positioning method, which includes: after a vehicle enters a semi-enclosed space, monitoring whether the vehicle is within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space; When the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, second broadcast information is sent, and the second broadcast information is used to indicate that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system so as to facilitate The vehicle is positioned according to the position information of the positioning system.
本申请实施例中,在车辆进入半封闭空间后,可由服务器或半封闭空间中的图像采集装置对车辆进行监测并判断其是否位于半封闭空间中某一定位系统的预设范围内,当确定该车辆位于某一定位系统的预设范围内时,服务器或半封闭空间中的图像采集装置向外发送第二广播信息,以使车辆根据第二广播信息确定自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内。In the embodiment of the present application, after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space can monitor the vehicle and determine whether it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system in the semi-enclosed space. When the vehicle is within the preset range of a certain positioning system, the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space sends out second broadcast information, so that the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information Inside.
半封闭空间是指卫星信号因受到屏蔽或遮挡导致信号差或不稳定的空间。半封闭空间包括信号不佳的地下空间、地上空间等。Semi-enclosed space refers to a space in which satellite signals are shielded or obscured, resulting in poor or unstable signals. Semi-enclosed space includes underground space and above ground space with poor signal.
可以看到,服务器或半封闭空间中的图像采集装置承担监测车辆的当前位置是否在定位系统的预设范围内的任务,车辆侧无需执行监测过程中的复杂算法,仅通过接收第二广播信息即可确定自身车辆是否位于定位系统的预设范围内,节省了车辆侧的计算资源,提高了车辆在半封闭空间中的定位效率。It can be seen that the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space is responsible for the task of monitoring whether the current position of the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system. The vehicle side does not need to execute the complex algorithm in the monitoring process, only by receiving the second broadcast information That is, it can be determined whether the own vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, which saves computing resources on the vehicle side and improves the positioning efficiency of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space.
基于第二方面,在可能的实施例中,所述监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内包括:监测所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第三距离;根据所述第三距离确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the second aspect, in a possible embodiment, the monitoring whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space includes: monitoring a third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system ; Determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system according to the third distance.
本申请实施例中,服务器或半封闭空间中的图像采集装置可以通过监测车辆与定位系统之间的第三距离判断车辆是否在该定位系统的预设范围内,在第三距离小于等于预设阈值,则车辆位于该定位系统的预设范围内。In the embodiment of the present application, the server or the image acquisition device in the semi-enclosed space can determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system by monitoring the third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system, and the third distance is less than or equal to the preset range. Threshold, the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system.
基于第二方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位系统包括图像采集装置和定位装置,所述地图还包括指示所述图像采集装置的离地高度的信息;所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发包含所述定位装置的位置信息的第一广播信息;所述车辆上设置有第二颜色装置;所述监测所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第三距离,包括;获取所述图像采集装置采集的第二环境图像,所述第二环境图像包含所述第二颜色装置的图像;根据所述第二环境图像确定所述车辆与所述图像采集装置之间的第四距离;根据所述第四距离和所述图像采集装置的离地高度,获得所述第三距离。Based on the second aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning system includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device, the map also includes information indicating the height of the image acquisition device from the ground; the positioning device is used to When the vehicle is located at the positioning device, the first broadcast information containing the location information of the positioning device is triggered; the vehicle is provided with a second color device; the monitoring of the first broadcast information between the vehicle and the positioning system Three distances, including; acquiring a second environment image collected by the image acquisition device, the second environment image including the image of the second color device; determining the vehicle and the image acquisition based on the second environment image The fourth distance between the devices; the third distance is obtained according to the fourth distance and the height of the image acquisition device from the ground.
其中,第三距离为颜色装置所在的车辆距离垂直平面的距离,垂直平面为定位装置所在的与车辆行驶方向垂直的平面;第四距离为颜色装置所在的车辆与该定位装置之间的空间距离。Among them, the third distance is the distance between the vehicle on which the color device is located and the vertical plane, and the vertical plane is the plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle on which the positioning device is located; the fourth distance is the spatial distance between the vehicle on which the color device is located and the positioning device .
本申请的一种实施例中,在服务器或者图像采集装置通过处理第二环境图像获得第四距离后,服务器或者图像采集装置获得第三距离的方式还可以是:根据第四距离和所述图像采集装置拍摄所述第二颜色装置时的俯仰角,获得所述第三距离。In an embodiment of the present application, after the server or the image acquisition device obtains the fourth distance by processing the second environment image, the method for the server or the image acquisition device to obtain the third distance may also be: according to the fourth distance and the image The pitch angle when the acquisition device photographs the second color device to obtain the third distance.
可以看到,服务器或设置于半封闭空间中的图像采集装置利用计算机视觉处理技术处理包含车辆上的颜色装置的第二环境图像来确定车辆是否在定位系统的预设范围内,这种方式不受半封闭空间中卫星信号屏蔽的影响。It can be seen that the server or the image acquisition device installed in the semi-enclosed space uses computer vision processing technology to process the second environment image containing the color device on the vehicle to determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system. This method is not Affected by the shielding of satellite signals in a semi-enclosed space.
基于第二方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位装置包括定位光栅或地磁感应器。Based on the second aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
基于第二方面,在可能的实施例中,所述根据所述第二环境图像确定所述车辆与所述图像采集装置之间的第四距离,包括:从所述第二环境图像中识别出所述第二颜色装置;根据所述第二颜色装置的图像确定所述第四距离。Based on the second aspect, in a possible embodiment, the determining the fourth distance between the vehicle and the image acquisition device according to the second environment image includes: identifying from the second environment image The second color device; determining the fourth distance according to the image of the second color device.
本申请实施例中,服务器或图像采集装置识别出第二环境图像中的第二颜色装置后获得第二颜色装置在第二环境图像中的像素位置以及尺寸大小,根据第二颜色装置在第二环境图像中的像素位置、尺寸大小以及地图中第二颜色装置的实际尺寸信息,确定上述第四距离。In the embodiment of the present application, the server or the image acquisition device recognizes the second color device in the second environment image and obtains the pixel position and size of the second color device in the second environment image, according to the second color device in the second environment image. The pixel location and size in the environmental image and the actual size information of the second color device in the map determine the fourth distance.
可以看到,服务器或半封闭空间中的图像采集装置通过识别车辆上的颜色装置进而确定颜色装置所在的车辆距离对应图像采集装置的第四距离,从而确定车辆距离该颜色装置 对应的定位装置的第三距离。这种方式不受半封闭空间中卫星信号屏蔽的影响,且由于半封闭空间的光照环境稳定,能提高识别车辆的颜色装置的准确性。It can be seen that the image acquisition device in the server or semi-enclosed space identifies the color device on the vehicle and then determines the fourth distance of the vehicle to which the color device is located corresponds to the image acquisition device, thereby determining the distance between the vehicle and the positioning device corresponding to the color device. The third distance. This method is not affected by the shielding of satellite signals in the semi-enclosed space, and because the light environment in the semi-enclosed space is stable, the accuracy of the color device for identifying the vehicle can be improved.
基于第二方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第二颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述从所述第二环境图像中识别出所述第二颜色装置,包括:通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述第二颜色装置。Based on the second aspect, in a possible embodiment, the second color device includes one or more identification lights; the recognizing the second color device from the second environment image includes: The color and sequence of the one or more identification lights are used to identify the second color device.
本申请实施例中,第二颜色装置中的各标识灯可被设置显示不同颜色的可见光。在一些可能的实施例中,第二颜色装置也可以包括至少一个可发光器件,或者,第二颜色装置还可以包括一个或多个带颜色的金属板。In the embodiment of the present application, the identification lights in the second color device can be configured to display visible lights of different colors. In some possible embodiments, the second color device may also include at least one light-emitting device, or the second color device may also include one or more colored metal plates.
可以看到,基于颜色装置的颜色和顺序识别第二环境图像中车辆上的颜色装置,从而获得车辆距离图像采集装置的第四距离,以及确定车辆距离该图像采集装置对应的定位装置的第三距离。这种方式不受半封闭空间中卫星信号屏蔽的影响,且由于半封闭空间的光照环境稳定,能提高识别车辆的颜色装置的准确性。It can be seen that the color device on the vehicle in the second environment image is identified based on the color and sequence of the color device, thereby obtaining the fourth distance of the vehicle from the image acquisition device, and determining the third distance of the vehicle from the positioning device corresponding to the image acquisition device. distance. This method is not affected by the shielding of satellite signals in the semi-enclosed space, and because the light environment in the semi-enclosed space is stable, the accuracy of the color device for identifying the vehicle can be improved.
基于第二方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第二广播信息携带了指示信息,所述指示信息指示了所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序,所述指示信息用于指示所述车辆根据所述指示信息指示的颜色和顺序确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the second aspect, in a possible embodiment, the second broadcast information carries indication information, the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights, and the indication information is used to indicate The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
可以看到,第二广播信息可用于辅助车辆判断自身当前所在的位置是否在定位系统的预设范围内,从而实现达到车辆监测自身是否在定位系统的预设范围内的目的。当车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内且接收到该定位系统触发时对应的第一广播信息时,本车辆当前的位置即为该定位系统对应的位置信息。可以看出,大大简化了车辆侧实现自身在半封闭空间中定位的流程,节省了车辆侧的计算资源,有效解决了半封闭空间中车辆难以准确定位的问题。It can be seen that the second broadcast information can be used to assist the vehicle in determining whether its current position is within the preset range of the positioning system, so as to achieve the purpose of monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system. When the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system and receives the corresponding first broadcast information when the positioning system is triggered, the current position of the vehicle is the position information corresponding to the positioning system. It can be seen that the process for the vehicle side to realize its positioning in the semi-enclosed space is greatly simplified, the computing resources on the vehicle side are saved, and the problem that the vehicle is difficult to accurately locate in the semi-enclosed space is effectively solved.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种监测装置,该监测装置包括接收器和处理器,其中,所述接收器用于获取图像采集装置采集的环境图像,所述环境图像包含颜色装置的图像;所述处理器用于:根据所述环境图像确定所述颜色装置与所述图像采集装置之间的距离;根据所述图像采集装置和所述颜色装置之间的位置关系以及所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的距离,确定所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的水平距离;根据所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的水平距离,确定在车辆进入所述半封闭空间后所述车辆位于所述半封闭空间中定位装置的预设范围内,以便于所述车辆根据所述定位装置的位置信息进行定位。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a monitoring device, the monitoring device includes a receiver and a processor, wherein the receiver is used to obtain an environmental image collected by an image acquisition device, and the environmental image includes an image of a color device. The processor is configured to: determine the distance between the color device and the image acquisition device according to the environmental image; according to the positional relationship between the image acquisition device and the color device and the image acquisition device The distance between the image acquisition device and the color device is determined, and the horizontal distance between the image acquisition device and the color device is determined; according to the horizontal distance between the image acquisition device and the color device, it is determined that the vehicle enters the After the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device in the semi-enclosed space, so that the vehicle can be positioned according to the position information of the positioning device.
基于第三方面,在可能的实施例中,所述处理器具体用于:从所述环境图像中识别出所述颜色装置;根据所述颜色装置的图像确定所述颜色装置与所述图像采集装置之间的距离。Based on the third aspect, in a possible embodiment, the processor is specifically configured to: identify the color device from the environmental image; determine the color device and the image collection based on the image of the color device The distance between the devices.
基于第三方面,在可能的实施例中,所述颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述处理器具体用于:通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述颜色装置。Based on the third aspect, in a possible embodiment, the color device includes one or more identification lights; the processor is specifically configured to: identify the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights.述色装置。 The color device.
基于第三方面,在可能的实施例中,当所述颜色装置为第一颜色装置时,所述第一颜色装置和所述定位装置位于所述半封闭空间中,所述图像采集装置和所述监测装置位于所述车辆上。Based on the third aspect, in a possible embodiment, when the color device is a first color device, the first color device and the positioning device are located in the semi-enclosed space, and the image acquisition device and the locating device are located in the semi-enclosed space. The monitoring device is located on the vehicle.
基于第三方面,在可能的实施例中,当所述颜色装置为第二颜色装置时,所述第二颜 色装置位于所述车辆上,所述图像采集装置和所述定位装置位于所述半封闭空间中,所述监测装置集成于所述图像采集装置中;所述监测装置还包括:发送器,用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置的预设范围内时,发送第二广播信息,以使所述车辆根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。Based on the third aspect, in a possible embodiment, when the color device is a second color device, the second color device is located on the vehicle, and the image acquisition device and the positioning device are located in the half. In a closed space, the monitoring device is integrated into the image acquisition device; the monitoring device further includes: a transmitter for sending second broadcast information when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device , So that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
基于第三方面,在可能的实施例中,当所述颜色装置为第二颜色装置时,所述第二颜色装置位于所述车辆上,所述图像采集装置和所述定位装置位于所述半封闭空间中,所述监测装置集成于服务器中;所述接收器具体用于:接收所述图像采集装置发送的所述环境图像;所述监测装置还包括:发送器,用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置的预设范围内时,发送第二广播信息,以使所述车辆根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。Based on the third aspect, in a possible embodiment, when the color device is a second color device, the second color device is located on the vehicle, and the image acquisition device and the positioning device are located in the half. In a closed space, the monitoring device is integrated in the server; the receiver is specifically used to: receive the environmental image sent by the image acquisition device; the monitoring device also includes: a transmitter, which is used to When it is within the preset range of the positioning device, sending second broadcast information, so that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
基于第三方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第二广播信息携带了指示信息,所述指示信息指示了所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序,所述指示信息用于指示所述车辆根据所述指示信息指示的颜色和顺序确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。Based on the third aspect, in a possible embodiment, the second broadcast information carries indication information, the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights, and the indication information is used to indicate The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种装置,该装置包括:监测单元,用于在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;获取单元,用于在所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,获取地图中所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息;单位单元,用于根据所述位置信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device that includes: a monitoring unit for monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space Acquisition unit, used for acquiring the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map when the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system; unit unit, used for The location information locates the vehicle on the map.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述地图为所述车辆从服务器下载的,或者,所述地图为所述车辆从半封闭空间入口处的路侧单元处下载的,或者,所述地图为所述车辆从半封闭空间中的其他车辆处获得的。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a server, or the map is downloaded by the vehicle from a roadside unit at the entrance of a semi-enclosed space, or The map is obtained by the vehicle from other vehicles in the semi-enclosed space.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述监测单元具体用于:确定所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第一距离;根据所述第一距离确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: determine a first distance between the vehicle and the positioning system; and determine whether the vehicle is located at the Within the preset range of the positioning system.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位系统包括第一颜色装置和定位装置,所述地图还包括指示所述第一颜色装置的离地高度的信息;所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发第一广播信息;所述装置还包括采集单元,用于拍摄第一环境图像,所述第一环境图像包含所述第一颜色装置的图像;所述监测单元具体用于,根据所述第一环境图像确定所述车辆与所述第一颜色装置之间的第二距离;根据所述第二距离和所述第一颜色装置的离地高度,获得所述第一距离。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, the map further includes information indicating the height of the first color device from the ground; the positioning device is used for Trigger first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; the device further includes a collection unit for shooting a first environment image, the first environment image including the image of the first color device; The monitoring unit is specifically configured to determine a second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image; according to the second distance and the ground clearance of the first color device, Obtain the first distance.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位系统包括第一颜色装置和定位装置,所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发第一广播信息;所述第一广播信息包括所述定位装置的位置信息;所述获取单元具体用于:根据所述定位装置发送的第一广播信息获得所述定位装置的位置信息;根据所述定位装置的位置信息确定所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, and the positioning device is used to trigger the first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; The first broadcast information includes the location information of the positioning device; the obtaining unit is specifically configured to: obtain the location information of the positioning device according to the first broadcast information sent by the positioning device; determine according to the location information of the positioning device Position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第一广播信息包括触发时刻和所述定位装置的位置信息,所述触发时刻用于指示所述定位装置被所述车辆触发的时刻,所述定位单元具体用于:根据所述位置信息和所述触发时刻在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the first broadcast information includes a trigger moment and location information of the positioning device, and the trigger moment is used to indicate the moment when the positioning device is triggered by the vehicle. The positioning unit is specifically configured to locate the vehicle on the map according to the location information and the trigger time.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述监测单元具体用于:从所述第一环境图像中识别出所述第一颜色装置;根据所述第一颜色装置的图像确定所述第二距离。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the first color device from the first environmental image; determine the first color device according to the image of the first color device Two distance.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第一颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述监测单元具体用于:所述从所述第一环境图像中识别出所述第一颜色装置,包括:通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述第一颜色装置。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the first color device includes one or more identification lights; the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the first color device from the first environmental image The color device includes: recognizing the first color device by recognizing the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位装置包括定位光栅或地磁感应器。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位单元还用于:在所述车辆不位于所述定位系统的预设范围内时,丢弃所述第一广播信息。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning unit is further configured to discard the first broadcast information when the vehicle is not within a preset range of the positioning system.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述获取单元用于:接收第二广播信息,所述第二广播信息用于指示位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的车辆;所述监测单元具体用于:根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the acquiring unit is configured to: receive second broadcast information, the second broadcast information being used to indicate vehicles located within a preset range of the positioning system; and the monitoring The unit is specifically configured to determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述车辆设置有第二颜色装置,所述第二颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述第二广播信息携带指示信息,所述指示信息指示了一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序;所述监测单元具体用于:根据所述第二广播信息指示的一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序是否与所述第二颜色装置匹配,来确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the vehicle is provided with a second color device, and the second color device includes one or more identification lights; the second broadcast information carries instruction information, the instruction information Indicates the color and sequence of one or more identification lights; the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: according to whether the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights indicated by the second broadcast information match the second color device, To determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system.
基于第四方面,在可能的实施例中,所述获取单元还用于:获取所述车辆的运动信息;所述定位单元还用于:根据所述车辆的位置信息和所述车辆的运动信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行导航。Based on the fourth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the acquiring unit is further configured to: acquire the movement information of the vehicle; the positioning unit is further configured to: according to the position information of the vehicle and the movement information of the vehicle Navigating the vehicle in the map.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种装置,该装置包括:监测单元,用于在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;广播单元:在监测到所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,发送第二广播信息,所述第二广播信息用于指示所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内,以便于所述车辆根据所述定位系统的位置信息进行定位。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device that includes: a monitoring unit for monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space ; Broadcast unit: in the case of monitoring that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system, send second broadcast information, the second broadcast information is used to indicate that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system Within the range to facilitate the positioning of the vehicle according to the position information of the positioning system.
基于第五方面,在可能的实施例中,所述监测单元具体用于:监测所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第三距离;根据所述第三距离确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: monitor a third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system; determine whether the vehicle is located at the Within the preset range of the positioning system.
基于第五方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位系统包括图像采集装置和定位装置,所述地图还包括指示所述图像采集装置的离地高度的信息;所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发包含所述定位装置的位置信息的第一广播信息;所述车辆上设置有第二颜色装置;所述装置还包括获取单元,用于获取所述图像采集装置拍摄的第二环境图像,所述第二环境图像包含所述第二颜色装置的图像;所述监测单元具体用于:根据所述第二环境图像确定所述车辆与所述图像采集装置之间的第四距离;根据所述第四距离和所述图像采集装置的离地高度,获得所述第三距离。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning system includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device, the map further includes information indicating the height of the image acquisition device from the ground; the positioning device is used to When the vehicle is located at the positioning device, the first broadcast information containing the location information of the positioning device is triggered; the vehicle is provided with a second color device; the device further includes an acquisition unit for acquiring the image collection A second environmental image taken by the device, where the second environmental image includes an image of the second color device; the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: determine the difference between the vehicle and the image acquisition device according to the second environmental image According to the fourth distance and the ground height of the image acquisition device, the third distance is obtained.
基于第五方面,在可能的实施例中,所述监测单元具体用于:从所述第二环境图像中识别出所述第二颜色装置;根据所述第二颜色装置的图像确定所述第四距离。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the second color device from the second environmental image; determine the second color device according to the image of the second color device Four distances.
基于第五方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第二颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述监测单元具体用于:通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述第二颜色 装置。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the second color device includes one or more identification lights; the monitoring unit is specifically configured to: identify the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights Out the second color device.
基于第五方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第二广播信息携带了指示信息,所述指示信息指示了所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序,所述指示信息用于指示所述车辆根据所述指示信息指示的颜色和顺序确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the second broadcast information carries indication information, the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights, and the indication information is used to indicate The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
基于第五方面,在可能的实施例中,所述定位装置包括定位光栅或地磁感应器。Based on the fifth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the positioning device includes a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种装置,该装置包括:获取单元,用于获取图像采集装置采集的环境图像,所述环境图像包含颜色装置的图像;处理单元用于:根据所述环境图像确定所述颜色装置与所述图像采集装置之间的距离;根据所述图像采集装置和所述颜色装置之间的位置关系以及所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的距离确定所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的水平距离;根据所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的水平距离,确定在车辆进入所述半封闭空间后所述车辆位于所述半封闭空间中定位装置的预设范围内,以便于所述车辆根据所述定位装置的位置信息进行定位。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a device, which includes: an acquisition unit configured to acquire an environmental image collected by an image acquisition device, where the environmental image includes an image of a color device; and a processing unit is configured to: The environmental image determines the distance between the color device and the image capture device; determines the distance between the image capture device and the color device and the distance between the image capture device and the color device The horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device; according to the horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device, it is determined that the vehicle is located in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space. Within the preset range of the positioning device in the enclosed space, so as to facilitate the positioning of the vehicle according to the position information of the positioning device.
基于第六方面,在可能的实施例中,所述处理单元具体用于:从所述环境图像中识别出所述颜色装置;根据所述颜色装置的图像确定所述颜色装置与所述图像采集装置之间的距离。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the processing unit is specifically configured to: identify the color device from the environmental image; determine the color device and the image collection based on the image of the color device The distance between the devices.
基于第六方面,在可能的实施例中,所述颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述处理单元具体用于:通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述颜色装置。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the color device includes one or more identification lights; the processing unit is specifically configured to: identify the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights.述色装置。 The color device.
基于第六方面,在可能的实施例中,所述装置还包括:广播单元,用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置的预设范围内时,发送第二广播信息,以使所述车辆根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the device further includes: a broadcasting unit, configured to send second broadcast information when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device, so that the vehicle Determining whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
基于第六方面,在可能的实施例中,所述获取单元具体用于:接收所述图像采集装置发送的所述环境图像;所述装置还包括:广播单元,用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置的预设范围内时,发送第二广播信息,以使所述车辆根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the acquisition unit is specifically configured to: receive the environmental image sent by the image acquisition device; the device further includes a broadcasting unit, which is configured to: When the positioning device is within the preset range, sending second broadcast information, so that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
基于第六方面,在可能的实施例中,所述第二广播信息携带了指示信息,所述指示信息指示了所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序,所述指示信息用于指示所述车辆根据所述指示信息指示的颜色和顺序确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。Based on the sixth aspect, in a possible embodiment, the second broadcast information carries indication information, the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights, and the indication information is used to indicate all The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种系统,还系统包括图像采集装置、颜色装置和定位装置,其中,颜色装置和定位装置设置于半封闭空间,图像采集装置设置于车辆上。图像采集装置用于采集包含颜色装置的图像并根据图像计算车辆与定位装置之间的水平距离,根据该水平距离确定车辆是否位于定位装置的预设范围内,以使车辆确定自身在定位装置的预设范围内时进行定位。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a system that further includes an image acquisition device, a color device, and a positioning device. The color device and the positioning device are arranged in a semi-enclosed space, and the image acquisition device is arranged on a vehicle. The image acquisition device is used to collect the image containing the color device and calculate the horizontal distance between the vehicle and the positioning device based on the image, and determine whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the horizontal distance, so that the vehicle can determine that it is in the position of the positioning device. Positioning is performed when within the preset range.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种系统,还系统包括图像采集装置、颜色装置和定位装置,其中,颜色装置设置于车辆上,定位装置和图像采集装置设置于半封闭空间。图像采集装置用于执行上述第二方面或者第二方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a system that further includes an image acquisition device, a color device, and a positioning device. The color device is installed on a vehicle, and the positioning device and the image acquisition device are installed in a semi-enclosed space. The image acquisition device is used to execute the method in the foregoing second aspect or any possible embodiment of the second aspect.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种系统,还系统包括图像采集装置、颜色装置、定位装置和服务器,其中,颜色装置设置于车辆上,定位装置和图像采集装置设置于半封闭空间。图像采集装置用于采集包含颜色装置的图像并将该图像发送给服务器,服务器用于 执行上述第二方面或者第二方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a system that also includes an image acquisition device, a color device, a positioning device, and a server. The color device is installed on the vehicle, and the positioning device and the image acquisition device are installed in a semi-enclosed space. The image acquisition device is used to acquire an image containing the color device and send the image to the server, and the server is used to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible embodiment of the second aspect.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读介质存储用于装置执行的程序代码,所述程序代码包括用于执行第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code for device execution, and the program code includes the program code for executing the first aspect or any of the first aspect. A method instruction in a possible implementation.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读介质存储用于装置执行的程序代码,所述程序代码包括用于执行第二方面或者第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code for execution by an apparatus, and the program code includes a program code for executing the second aspect or the second aspect. Instructions for methods in any possible implementation.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读介质存储用于装置执行的程序代码,所述程序代码包括用于执行第三方面或者第三方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable medium stores program code for execution by the device, and the program code includes the program code for executing the third aspect or the third aspect. Instructions for methods in any possible implementation.
第十三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机软件产品,该计算机程序软件产品包括程序指令,当该计算机软件产品被装置执行时,该装置执行前述第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。该计算机软件产品可以为一个软件安装包,在需要使用前述第一方面的任一种可能的设计提供的方法的情况下,可以下载该计算机软件产品并在装置上执行该计算机软件产品,以实现第一方面或者第一方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。In a thirteenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer software product, the computer program software product includes program instructions, and when the computer software product is executed by a device, the device executes the foregoing first aspect or any one of the first aspects. The method in possible embodiments. The computer software product may be a software installation package. In the case that any one of the possible designs provided in the aforementioned first aspect needs to be used, the computer software product can be downloaded and executed on the device to achieve The method in the first aspect or any possible embodiment of the first aspect.
第十四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机软件产品,该计算机程序软件产品包括程序指令,当该计算机软件产品被装置执行时,该装置执行前述第二方面或者第二方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。该计算机软件产品可以为一个软件安装包,在需要使用前述第二方面的任一种可能的设计提供的方法的情况下,可以下载该计算机软件产品并在装置上执行该计算机软件产品,以实现第二方面或者第二方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。In a fourteenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer software product. The computer program software product includes program instructions. When the computer software product is executed by a device, the device executes the foregoing second aspect or any one of the second aspects. The method in possible embodiments. The computer software product may be a software installation package. In the case that any one of the possible designs provided in the foregoing second aspect needs to be used, the computer software product can be downloaded and executed on the device to achieve The method in the second aspect or any possible embodiment of the second aspect.
第十五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机软件产品,该计算机程序软件产品包括程序指令,当该计算机软件产品被装置执行时,该装置执行前述第三方面或者第三方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。该计算机软件产品可以为一个软件安装包,在需要使用前述第三方面的任一种可能的设计提供的方法的情况下,可以下载该计算机软件产品并在装置上执行该计算机软件产品,以实现第三方面或者第三方面的任一可能的实施例中的所述方法。In a fifteenth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer software product. The computer program software product includes program instructions. When the computer software product is executed by a device, the device executes the foregoing third aspect or any one of the third aspects. The method in possible embodiments. The computer software product may be a software installation package. In the case that any one of the possible designs provided in the foregoing third aspect needs to be used, the computer software product can be downloaded and executed on the device to achieve The method in the third aspect or any possible embodiment of the third aspect.
可以看到,实施本申请实施例,在卫星信号不佳的场景中,一方面,可以通过设置多组定位装置和多组具有不同颜色的颜色装置,建立颜色装置和定位装置与该场景中各位置的对应关系,从而实现对车辆的准确定位;另一方面,还可以通过图像采集装置识别车载颜色装置的颜色以及顺序确定车辆的位置,再结合定位装置是否被该车辆触发实现对车辆的精准定位。有效解决了在卫星信号被遮挡或者屏蔽的隧道、停车场等半封闭空间中车辆无法定位或定位不准的问题,提升了车辆在半封闭空间中定位的鲁棒性,降低了半封闭空间下车辆定位的施工成本。It can be seen that implementing the embodiments of this application, in a scenario with poor satellite signals, on the one hand, multiple sets of positioning devices and multiple sets of color devices with different colors can be set up to establish the color device and the positioning device with each other in the scene. Correspondence between the positions, so as to realize the accurate positioning of the vehicle; on the other hand, the color of the on-board color device can also be recognized by the image acquisition device and the position of the vehicle can be determined in sequence, and then combined with whether the positioning device is triggered by the vehicle to achieve the accurate positioning of the vehicle position. It effectively solves the problem of inaccurate or inaccurate positioning of vehicles in semi-enclosed spaces such as tunnels and parking lots where satellite signals are blocked or shielded, improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces, and reduces The construction cost of vehicle positioning.
附图说明Description of the drawings
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图是本申请的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to explain the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, the following will briefly introduce the drawings used in the description of the embodiments. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are some embodiments of the present application. Ordinary technicians can obtain other drawings based on these drawings without creative work.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种应用的系统架构;FIG. 1 is an application system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的又一种应用的系统架构;Figure 2 is another application system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的又一种应用的系统架构;FIG. 3 is a system architecture of another application provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位方法的流程图;Fig. 4 is a flowchart of a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的又一种车辆定位方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of another vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例提供的又一种车辆定位方法的流程图;FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7A是本申请实施例提供的一种标识灯组的示意图;FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of an identification light group provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7B是本申请实施例提供的又一种标识灯组的示意图;FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of yet another identification light group provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8A是本申请实施例提供的一种标识灯组在隧道中的部署示意图;FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of the deployment of an identification light group in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图8B是本申请实施例提供的又一种标识灯组在隧道中的部署示意图;FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram of another deployment of an identification light group in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图9是本申请实施例提供的一种车辆在隧道中的定位示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10A是本申请实施例提供的又一种车辆在隧道中的部署示意图;FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram of yet another vehicle deployment in a tunnel provided by an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图10B是本申请实施例提供的又一种车辆在隧道中的部署示意图;FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of yet another vehicle deployment in a tunnel provided by an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图11是本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位的场景示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning scene provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种标识灯故障检测方法的流程图;FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a method for detecting a failure of an indicator lamp provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请本实施例提供的一种车辆定位方法的流程图;FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a vehicle positioning method provided by this embodiment of the present application;
图14A是本申请实施例提供的一种车辆在隧道中的定位示意图;14A is a schematic diagram of positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14B是本申请实施例提供的又一种车辆在隧道中的定位示意图;14B is a schematic diagram of yet another vehicle positioning in a tunnel provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位的场景示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning scene provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位的场景示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of a vehicle positioning scene provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17是本申请本实施例提供的一种装置的结构示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application;
图18是本申请本实施例提供的又一种装置的结构示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of another device provided by this embodiment of the present application;
图19是本申请本实施例提供的一种装置的结构示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application;
图20是本申请本实施例提供的一种装置的结构示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application;
图21是本申请本实施例提供的一种装置的功能结构示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application;
图22是本申请本实施例提供的一种装置的功能结构示意图;FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application;
图23是本申请本实施例提供的一种装置的功能结构示意图。FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by this embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
在本申请实施例中使用的术语是仅仅出于描述特定实施例的目的,而非旨在限制本申请。本申请实施例中的说明书和权利要求书中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别不同 对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。在本申请实施例和所附权利要求书中所使用的单数形式的“一种”、“所述”和“该”也旨在包括多数形式,除非上下文清楚地表示其他含义。还应当理解,本文中使用的术语“和/或”是指并包含一个或多个相关联的列出项目的任何或所有可能组合。The terms used in the embodiments of the present application are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments, and are not intended to limit the present application. The terms "first" and "second" in the specification and claims in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish different objects, rather than to describe a specific sequence. The singular forms of "a", "the" and "the" used in the embodiments of the present application and the appended claims are also intended to include plural forms, unless the context clearly indicates other meanings. It should also be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein refers to and includes any or all possible combinations of one or more associated listed items.
为了便于理解,下面先对本申请实施例可能涉及的相关术语等进行介绍。For ease of understanding, the following first introduces related terms and the like that may be involved in the embodiments of the present application.
(1)网联通信(1) Networked communication
网联通信技术应用于车辆中常被称之为车联网(Internet of Vehicles,IoV),是以车内网、车际网和车载移动互联网为基础,按照约定的通信协议和数据交互标准,在V-X(车、路、人及云端等)之间,进行无线通讯和信息交换的大系统网络,即可以实现车与车、车与设施、车与云端等的实时在线通信。其中,车与车之间的通信也叫车车通信(Vehicle to Vehicle,V2V);车与设施之间的通信也叫车路通信(Vehicle to Infrastructure,V2I),即指车与道路通过路侧通信设备之间进行通信;车与云端之间的通信也叫车云通信(Vehicle to Network,V2N),即指车与云端通过蜂窝网络通信。The application of networked communication technology in vehicles is often referred to as the Internet of Vehicles (IoV). It is based on the in-vehicle network, the inter-vehicle network and the in-vehicle mobile Internet. (Cars, roads, people, clouds, etc.), a large system network for wireless communication and information exchange, that can realize real-time online communication between cars, cars and facilities, cars and the cloud. Among them, the communication between the car and the car is also called Vehicle to Vehicle (V2V); the communication between the car and the facility is also called Vehicle to Infrastructure (V2I), which means that the car and the road pass through the roadside. Communication between communication devices; the communication between the car and the cloud is also called Vehicle to Network (V2N), which refers to the communication between the car and the cloud through a cellular network.
(2)RGB色彩空间(2) RGB color space
RGB色彩模式是工业界的一种颜色标准,是通过对红(R)、绿(G)、蓝(B)三个颜色通道的变化以及它们相互之间的叠加来得到各式各样的颜色,RGB即是代表红、绿、蓝三个通道的颜色,这个标准几乎包括了人类视力所能感知的所有颜色,是运用最广的颜色系统之一。在RGB色彩空间中,每个颜色通道的取值范围均为[0,255],其中,“0”表示没有刺激量,“255”表示刺激量达到最大值,例如:当R、G、B三者均为0时,三通道合成表示黑色;当R、G、B三者均为255时,三通道合成白光。本申请实施例中,对某种颜色来说,其三个通道的取值(r,g,b)称作该颜色的颜色编码。The RGB color model is a color standard in the industry. It obtains a variety of colors by changing the three color channels of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) and superimposing them with each other. RGB is the color representing the three channels of red, green, and blue. This standard includes almost all colors that human vision can perceive, and it is one of the most widely used color systems. In the RGB color space, the value range of each color channel is [0,255], where "0" means no stimulus, and "255" means the stimulus reaches the maximum value, for example: when R, G, B are three When all values are 0, three-channel synthesis means black; when R, G, and B are all 255, three-channel synthesis means white light. In the embodiment of the present application, for a certain color, the values (r, g, b) of the three channels are called the color code of the color.
(3)惯性导航系统(3) Inertial navigation system
惯性导航系统(Inertial Navigation System,INS)也称作惯性参考系统,是一种不依赖于外部信息、也不向外部辐射能量(如无线电导航那样)的自主式导航系统。惯性导航的基本工作原理是以牛顿力学定律为基础,通过测量载体(例如,车辆)在惯性参考系的加速度,将它对时间进行积分,且把它变换到导航坐标系中,就能够得到在导航坐标系中的速度、偏航角和位置等信息。An inertial navigation system (Inertial Navigation System, INS) is also called an inertial reference system, which is an autonomous navigation system that does not rely on external information and does not radiate energy to the outside (such as radio navigation). The basic working principle of inertial navigation is based on the laws of Newton’s mechanics. By measuring the acceleration of the carrier (for example, a vehicle) in the inertial reference system, integrating it over time, and transforming it into the navigation coordinate system, you can get the Information such as speed, yaw angle and position in the navigation coordinate system.
惯性导航的核心器件是惯性测量单元(Inertial Measurement Unit,IMU)常安装与运动体的重心上,是用于测量运动体的三轴姿态角(或角速率)以及加速度的装置,其主要包括加速度计和陀螺仪这两种惯性元件,其中,加速度计用于检测运动体的加速度信号,而陀螺仪用于检测运动体相对于导航坐标系的角速度信号。The core component of inertial navigation is the Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU), which is often installed on the center of gravity of the moving body. It is a device used to measure the three-axis attitude angle (or angular rate) and acceleration of the moving body, which mainly includes acceleration. There are two types of inertial elements, namely, the meter and the gyroscope. Among them, the accelerometer is used to detect the acceleration signal of the moving body, and the gyroscope is used to detect the angular velocity signal of the moving body relative to the navigation coordinate system.
具体地,惯性导航系统可以从一已知点的位置根据连续测得的运动体航向角和速度推算出其下一点的位置,因而可连续测出运动体的当前位置。惯性导航系统中的陀螺仪用来形成一个导航坐标系,使加速度计的测量轴稳定在该坐标系中,并给出航向和姿态角;加速度计用来测量运动体的加速度,经过对时间的一次积分得到速度,速度再经过对时间的一次积分即可得到位移。Specifically, the inertial navigation system can calculate the position of the next point from the position of a known point based on the continuously measured heading angle and speed of the moving body, so that it can continuously measure the current position of the moving body. The gyroscope in the inertial navigation system is used to form a navigation coordinate system, so that the measurement axis of the accelerometer is stabilized in the coordinate system, and the heading and attitude angle are given; the accelerometer is used to measure the acceleration of the moving body, and the time The speed is obtained by integrating once, and the displacement can be obtained by integrating the speed once more with respect to time.
通常情况下,车辆定位主要依赖于全球卫星导航系统(Global Navigation Satellite System,GNSS)以及惯性导航系统(Inertial Navigation System,INS),在车辆处于隧道、地下停车场等信号较弱或有屏蔽、遮挡的场景下时,不妨以隧道为例进行描述,一方面,由于隧道的墙壁厚,导致车辆在隧道中无法接收到卫星信号或者接收到的卫星信号弱以使车辆无法进行准确定位,另一方面,由于隧道的距离远,若车辆使用自身的惯性导航计算自身的实时位置,由于惯性测量单元的累积误差会随着时间显著增大,从而导致惯性导航的精准度难以满足要求。Under normal circumstances, vehicle positioning mainly relies on Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) and Inertial Navigation System (INS). When the vehicle is in a tunnel or underground parking lot, the signal is weak or shielded or blocked. In the scenario of, might as well take a tunnel as an example to describe. On the one hand, because the walls of the tunnel are thick, the vehicle cannot receive satellite signals in the tunnel or the received satellite signals are weak so that the vehicle cannot perform accurate positioning. On the other hand, Due to the long distance of the tunnel, if the vehicle uses its own inertial navigation to calculate its real-time position, the cumulative error of the inertial measurement unit will increase significantly over time, resulting in the inertial navigation accuracy difficult to meet the requirements.
为了能解决隧道中车辆的定位问题,目前已提出一些新的替代方案,例如雷达定位、伪卫星定位(例如,超带宽Ultra Wide Band,UWB)、射频识别技术(Radio Frequency Identification,RFID)等,但上述这些方案都是基于电磁波的定位方案,一方面,电磁波在隧道中的传输会有明显的多路径效应,影响车辆的准确定位,另一方面,上述方案的应用过程中需额外安装的设备的成本高,难以批量布置,方案的性价比低。In order to solve the problem of vehicle positioning in tunnels, some new alternatives have been proposed, such as radar positioning, pseudolite positioning (for example, Ultra Wide Band, UWB), and Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), etc. However, the above solutions are all based on electromagnetic wave positioning solutions. On the one hand, the transmission of electromagnetic waves in the tunnel will have obvious multipath effects, which will affect the accurate positioning of the vehicle. On the other hand, the application of the above solutions requires additional equipment. The cost of the solution is high, it is difficult to arrange in batches, and the cost-effectiveness of the solution is low.
此外,还有人提出由于隧道内的光照环境稳定,利用隧道内环境亮度变化对车辆进行定位,但隧道中的环境亮度变化属于短周期变化,且光线由强到弱或由弱到强的变化是渐变的,导致检测光线由强到弱或由弱到强的转变点很容易出现计算错误,该方案的实用性受到较大限制。因此,急需一种方案能解决隧道、地下停车场等卫星信号较弱或有屏蔽、遮挡的场景下车辆的定位问题。In addition, some people have proposed that because the lighting environment in the tunnel is stable, the changes in the ambient brightness in the tunnel are used to locate vehicles, but the changes in the ambient brightness in the tunnel are short-period changes, and the light changes from strong to weak or from weak to strong. Gradually, the transition point of detecting light from strong to weak or from weak to strong is prone to calculation errors, and the practicability of this scheme is greatly limited. Therefore, there is an urgent need for a solution that can solve the problem of vehicle positioning in scenarios where satellite signals such as tunnels and underground parking lots are weak or are shielded or obscured.
下面描述本申请实施例应用的一种系统架构。参见图1,图1示例性地给出了本申请实施例应用的半封闭空间中车辆定位系统的示意性框图。如图1所示,该系统10包括车辆和至少一组定位系统,每组定位系统都包括定位装置和颜色装置,且每组定位系统均设置于半封闭空间中,半封闭空间为允许车辆行驶的卫星信号较弱的空间(例如,隧道、地下停车场等),车辆上安装有图像采集装置,图像采集装置用于采集车辆行驶时前方的环境图像,该环境图像中包含颜色装置的图像。图像采集装置可以是摄像机、相机或其他具有图像采集功能的装置,本申请不做具体限定。图1中图像采集装置不妨以摄像机为例进行示例性阐述,但本申请实施例不限定图像采集装置仅为摄像机。定位系统中的定位装置通过无线连接的方式和车辆进行通信。The following describes a system architecture applied by the embodiment of the present application. Referring to Fig. 1, Fig. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a vehicle positioning system in a semi-enclosed space applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, the system 10 includes a vehicle and at least one set of positioning systems. Each set of positioning systems includes a positioning device and a color device, and each set of positioning systems is set in a semi-enclosed space. The semi-enclosed space allows vehicles to travel. In spaces with weak satellite signals (for example, tunnels, underground parking lots, etc.), an image acquisition device is installed on the vehicle. The image acquisition device is used to collect an image of the environment in front of the vehicle when the vehicle is driving. The environment image contains the image of the color device. The image acquisition device may be a video camera, a camera or other devices with an image acquisition function, which is not specifically limited in this application. The image acquisition device in FIG. 1 may be illustrated by taking a camera as an example, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the image acquisition device to only a camera. The positioning device in the positioning system communicates with the vehicle through a wireless connection.
半封闭空间是指允许车辆行驶但卫星信号因受到屏蔽或遮挡导致信号差或不稳定的空间。半封闭空间可以是地下隧道、地下停车场、矿井、地下仓库、地下工地等空间,还可以是地下管道、下水道、地窖、涵洞、地坑、暗沟等空间,本申请实施例不做具体限定。需要说明的是,半封闭空间并不限于指地面以下的空间,也可以指地面上的允许车辆行驶但卫星信号差的空间,例如:地上隧道、室内停车场、室内仓库等。下文半封闭空间不妨以隧道为例进行方案的示例性阐述,但是本申请实施例不限定半封闭空间仅为隧道。Semi-enclosed space refers to a space where vehicles are allowed to travel, but satellite signals are shielded or blocked, resulting in poor or unstable signals. The semi-enclosed space can be underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, underground construction sites, etc., and can also be underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, pits, hidden trenches and other spaces, which are not specifically limited in the embodiments of this application. It should be noted that the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground where vehicles are allowed but the satellite signal is poor, such as: ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, indoor warehouses, etc. In the following semi-closed space, a tunnel may be used as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-closed space to only a tunnel.
在一些可能的实施例中,车辆内还包含监测装置,监测装置用于对摄像机采集的环境图像进行处理和分析,例如,识别环境图像中的颜色装置、根据颜色装置的图像计算颜色装置与摄像机之间的距离等,以辅助车辆判断自身是否在该颜色装置对应的定位装置的预设范围内,进一步地,车辆结合接收到的来自该定位装置被触发时的第一广播信息,可以根据该定位装置的位置实现自身在半封闭空间中的定位。需要说明的是,监测装置可以集 成于车辆的摄像机中,也可以独立于摄像机存在于车辆中,本申请不做具体限定。In some possible embodiments, the vehicle also contains a monitoring device, which is used to process and analyze the environmental image collected by the camera, for example, to identify the color device in the environmental image, to calculate the color device and the camera based on the image of the color device To assist the vehicle in determining whether it is within the preset range of the positioning device corresponding to the color device, further, the vehicle can combine the received first broadcast information from when the positioning device is triggered, according to the The position of the positioning device realizes its own positioning in the semi-enclosed space. It should be noted that the monitoring device can be integrated in the camera of the vehicle, or can exist in the vehicle independently of the camera, which is not specifically limited in this application.
示例性地,在监测装置集成于车辆的摄像机时,摄像机在采集到包含颜色装置的环境图像后可直接对该环境图像进行处理,在处理结果指示车辆位于该颜色装置对应的定位装置的预设范围内时,摄像机可与车辆内的控制单元(例如,处理器)通信以使控制单元根据定位装置的位置信息对车辆进行定位。Exemplarily, when the monitoring device is integrated into the camera of the vehicle, the camera can directly process the environment image after collecting the environmental image containing the color device, and the processing result indicates that the vehicle is located in the preset position of the positioning device corresponding to the color device. When in range, the camera may communicate with a control unit (for example, a processor) in the vehicle to enable the control unit to locate the vehicle according to the position information of the positioning device.
示例性地,在监测装置集成于车辆里但独立于车辆里的摄像机存在时,监测装置先获取摄像机采集到的包含颜色装置的环境图像,并对该环境图像进行相应处理,在处理结果指示车辆位于该颜色装置对应的定位装置的预设范围内时,监测装置可与车辆内的控制单元(例如,处理器)通信以使控制单元根据定位装置的位置信息对车辆进行定位。Exemplarily, when the monitoring device is integrated in the vehicle but independent of the presence of the camera in the vehicle, the monitoring device first obtains the environmental image including the color device collected by the camera, and performs corresponding processing on the environmental image, and the processing result indicates the vehicle When located within the preset range of the positioning device corresponding to the color device, the monitoring device may communicate with a control unit (for example, a processor) in the vehicle to enable the control unit to locate the vehicle according to the location information of the positioning device.
颜色装置可以用于显示一种单一的颜色,也可以用于同时显示多种不同颜色。多个颜色装置安装于隧道中,通常安装于隧道的顶部,以使车辆的摄像机易于采集到颜色装置。在一些可能的实施例中,也可以安装在隧道的侧壁,本申请实施例不做具体限定。由于隧道一般较长,因此多个颜色装置被间隔设置。总之,颜色装置尽可能正对行驶的车辆,在车辆高速行驶时,能有效降低光流造成的干扰。一具体实施中,颜色装置可以是标识灯组,标识灯组包含至少一个标识灯,每个标识灯可以被预先被设置显示一种颜色的可见光,在每个标识灯组的标识灯数量为多个时,每个标识灯组呈现的即为多个颜色的排列组合。又一具体实施中,颜色装置还可以是至少一个带颜色的金属板或者其他可以显示颜色的装置,本申请实施例不做限定。The color device can be used to display a single color, or it can be used to display multiple different colors at the same time. Multiple color devices are installed in the tunnel, usually on the top of the tunnel, so that the vehicle's camera can easily capture the color device. In some possible embodiments, it may also be installed on the side wall of the tunnel, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application. Since the tunnel is generally long, multiple color devices are arranged at intervals. In short, the color device is as direct as possible to the moving vehicle, and when the vehicle is running at high speed, it can effectively reduce the interference caused by the optical flow. In a specific implementation, the color device may be an identification light group, the identification light group includes at least one identification light, and each identification light can be set to display a color of visible light in advance, and the number of identification lights in each identification light group is more At this time, each identification light group presents a permutation and combination of multiple colors. In another specific implementation, the color device may also be at least one colored metal plate or other device that can display colors, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
定位装置可以是定位光栅或者地磁感应器,定位装置被触发时,被触发的定位装置可以向附近的所有车辆播报指示了自身被触发的广播信息。由于定位装置与颜色装置一一对应,若定位装置和颜色装置的数量均为K,即第Ki个颜色装置对应第Ki个定位装置。由于第Ki定位装置与第Ki个颜色装置安装于同一位置,因此第Ki个颜色装置的位置和第Ki个定位装置的位置均与第Ki个定位系统的位置信息相同。The positioning device may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor. When the positioning device is triggered, the triggered positioning device can broadcast a broadcast message indicating that it is triggered to all nearby vehicles. Since the positioning device corresponds to the color device one-to-one, if the number of the positioning device and the color device are both K, that is, the Ki-th color device corresponds to the Ki-th positioning device. Since the Ki-th positioning device and the Ki-th color device are installed in the same position, the position of the Ki-th color device and the position of the Ki-th positioning device are both the same as the position information of the Ki-th positioning system.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对定位系统中的颜色装置和定位装置在半封闭空间中的安装位置不做具体限定,例如,定位系统中的颜色装置和定位装置可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的同一平面上,如同一位置同一高度、同一位置不同高度,其中,同一位置是指在同一平面上;除此之外,颜色装置和定位装置还可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的不同平面上,但颜色装置和定位装置所在平面之间的距离不应相差太远。It should be noted that the embodiment of the application does not specifically limit the installation position of the color device and the positioning device in the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space. For example, the color device and the positioning device in the positioning system can be set in the direction of the vehicle. On the same vertical plane, such as the same location at the same height, the same location at different heights, where the same location refers to the same plane; in addition, the color device and the positioning device can also be set on different planes perpendicular to the direction of the vehicle. However, the distance between the color device and the plane where the positioning device is located should not be too far apart.
下面描述本申请实施例应用的又一种系统架构。参见图2,图2示例性地给出了本申请实施例应用的半封闭空间车辆定位系统的示意性框图。如图2所示,该系统20可以包括服务器、车辆和至少一组定位系统,其中,每组定位系统均包括图像采集装置和定位装置,定位系统安装于半封闭空间中,车辆上安装有一个颜色装置。多个定位装置、多个图像采集装置、车辆通过无线连接的方式与服务器进行通信。The following describes another system architecture applied by the embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 2, FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a semi-enclosed space vehicle positioning system applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, the system 20 may include a server, a vehicle, and at least one set of positioning systems, where each set of positioning systems includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device, the positioning system is installed in a semi-enclosed space, and a vehicle is installed Color device. Multiple positioning devices, multiple image acquisition devices, and vehicles communicate with the server through wireless connections.
图像采集装置可以是摄像机、相机或其他具有图像采集功能的装置,本申请不做具体限定。图2中图像采集装置不妨以摄像机为例进行示例性阐述,但本申请实施例不限定图像采集装置仅为摄像机。The image acquisition device may be a video camera, a camera or other devices with an image acquisition function, which is not specifically limited in this application. The image acquisition device in FIG. 2 may be illustrated by taking a camera as an example, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the image acquisition device to only a camera.
半封闭空间是指允许车辆行驶但卫星信号较差的空间,半封闭空间可以是地下隧道、 地下停车场、矿井、地下仓库、地下工地等空间,还可以是地下管道、下水道、地窖、涵洞、地坑、暗沟等空间,本申请实施例不做具体限定。需要说明的是,半封闭空间并不限于指地面以下的空间,也可以指地面上的允许车辆行驶且卫星信号差的空间,例如:地上隧道、室内停车场、室内仓库等。下文半封闭空间不妨以隧道为例进行方案的示例性阐述,但是本申请实施例不限定半封闭空间仅为隧道。Semi-enclosed space refers to the space where vehicles are allowed to travel but the satellite signal is poor. Semi-enclosed space can be underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, underground construction sites, etc., or underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, etc. Spaces such as pits and dark ditches are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application. It should be noted that the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, indoor warehouses, etc. In the following semi-closed space, a tunnel may be used as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-closed space to only a tunnel.
服务器的功能在于,一方面,用于接收定位系统中的摄像机发送的已采集的环境图像,并将这些环境图像根据摄像机的编号进行存储。另一方面,服务器中还集成有监测装置,用于对接收到的环境图像进行处理和分析,例如,识别环境图像中的颜色装置、根据颜色装置的图像计算颜色装置与摄像机之间的距离等,以监测是否有车辆位于摄像机对应的定位装置的预设范围内,若定位装置的预设范围内有车辆,则向外发送第二广播信息,第二广播信息指示了位于该定位装置预设范围内的车辆。在一些可能的实施例中,服务器还可以向即将进入或已进入半封闭空间中的车辆发送半封闭空间的地图,地图中包括定位系统的位置信息、摄像机的编号、摄像机的离地高度等信息。在一些可能的实施例中,定位系统被触发时,还可由服务器向外播报第一广播信息,第一广播信息指示有车辆触发了该定位系统。The function of the server is that, on the one hand, it is used to receive the collected environmental images sent by the cameras in the positioning system, and store these environmental images according to the camera numbers. On the other hand, the server is also integrated with a monitoring device for processing and analyzing the received environmental image, for example, identifying the color device in the environmental image, calculating the distance between the color device and the camera based on the image of the color device, etc. , To monitor whether there is a vehicle within the preset range of the positioning device corresponding to the camera. If there is a vehicle within the preset range of the positioning device, the second broadcast information is sent out, and the second broadcast information indicates that it is located in the preset range of the positioning device. Vehicles within range. In some possible embodiments, the server may also send a map of the semi-enclosed space to vehicles that are about to enter or have entered the semi-enclosed space. The map includes the location information of the positioning system, the number of the camera, and the height of the camera from the ground. . In some possible embodiments, when the positioning system is triggered, the server may also broadcast the first broadcast information to the outside, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle has triggered the positioning system.
颜色装置安装于车辆上,通常安装于车辆的顶部,以使其易于被设置于半封闭空间中的摄像机拍摄到。在一些可能的实施例中,颜色装置也可以安装于车前盖上或车辆上其他显眼的位置。颜色装置为可以调控颜色的装置,例如,标识灯组,标识灯组包括至少一个标识灯,每个标识灯可以被设置显示一种颜色的可见光,一个标识灯组呈现的为一种不同颜色的排列组合。需要说明的是,不同车辆上的颜色装置呈现的颜色或颜色排列顺序是不同的,换句话说,即每辆车上的颜色装置具有唯一性。The color device is installed on the vehicle, usually on the top of the vehicle, so that it can be easily captured by a camera installed in a semi-enclosed space. In some possible embodiments, the color device may also be installed on the front cover of the vehicle or other conspicuous locations on the vehicle. The color device is a device that can adjust the color, for example, an identification light group. The identification light group includes at least one identification light. Each identification light can be set to display one color of visible light, and one identification light group presents a different color Permutations. It should be noted that the colors or the order of the colors presented by the color devices on different vehicles are different. In other words, the color devices on each vehicle are unique.
摄像机,通常情况下,安装于隧道的天花板顶部,用于拍摄隧道中的车辆上的颜色装置。摄像机将采集的图像发送给服务器,以使服务器将接收的图像根据摄像机的编号进行存储。由于隧道一般较长,多个摄像机在隧道中被间隔安装,相邻的摄像机之间的距离可以是固定的,也可以根据隧道的弯道参数等因地制宜,本申请实施例不做具体限定。Cameras, usually, are installed on the top of the ceiling of the tunnel, and are used to photograph the color devices on the vehicles in the tunnel. The camera sends the collected images to the server, so that the server stores the received images according to the camera number. Since the tunnel is generally long, multiple cameras are installed at intervals in the tunnel, and the distance between adjacent cameras may be fixed, or it may be adjusted according to local conditions such as the curve parameters of the tunnel, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
定位装置可以是定位光栅或地磁感应器,定位装置的位置信息存储于服务器中。定位装置被车辆触发时,定位装置可以直接向外发送第一广播信息,也可以向服务器上报自身的编号以使服务器发送第一广播信息,本申请不做限定。在一些可能的实施例中,第一广播信息中还可以携带该定位装置的位置信息,以辅助车辆实现自身在半封闭空间中的精确定位。The positioning device may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor, and the location information of the positioning device is stored in the server. When the positioning device is triggered by a vehicle, the positioning device may directly send the first broadcast information to the outside, or may report its own number to the server so that the server may send the first broadcast information, which is not limited in this application. In some possible embodiments, the first broadcast information may also carry the position information of the positioning device to assist the vehicle in realizing its precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对定位系统中的图像采集装置和定位装置在半封闭空间中的安装位置不做具体限定,例如,定位系统中的图像采集装置和定位装置可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的同一平面上,如同一位置同一高度、同一位置不同高度,其中,同一位置是指在同一平面上;除此之外,图像采集装置和定位装置还可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的不同平面上,但图像采集装置和定位装置所在平面之间的距离不应相差太远。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the installation position of the image acquisition device and the positioning device in the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space. On the same plane where the driving direction is vertical, such as the same location at the same height, the same location at different heights, where the same location refers to the same plane; in addition, the image acquisition device and positioning device can also be set perpendicular to the vehicle’s driving direction The distance between the image acquisition device and the plane where the positioning device is located should not be too far apart.
下面描述本申请实施例应用的又一种系统架构。参见图3,图3示例性地给出了本申请实施例应用的半封闭空间车辆定位系统的示意性框图。如图3所示,该系统30可以包 括车辆和至少一组定位系统,其中,每组定位系统均包括设置图像采集装置和定位装置,定位系统安装于半封闭空间中,车辆上安装有一个颜色装置。多组定位系统通过无线连接的方式与车辆进行通信。图像采集装置可以是摄像机、相机或其他具有图像采集功能的装置,本申请不做具体限定。图3中图像采集装置不妨以摄像机为例进行示例性阐述,但本申请实施例不限定图像采集装置仅为摄像机。The following describes another system architecture applied by the embodiment of the present application. Referring to Fig. 3, Fig. 3 exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a semi-enclosed space vehicle positioning system applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 3, the system 30 may include a vehicle and at least one set of positioning systems, where each set of positioning systems includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device. The positioning system is installed in a semi-enclosed space, and a color is installed on the vehicle. Device. The multi-group positioning system communicates with the vehicle through a wireless connection. The image acquisition device may be a video camera, a camera or other devices with an image acquisition function, which is not specifically limited in this application. The image acquisition device in FIG. 3 may be illustrated by taking a camera as an example, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the image acquisition device to only a camera.
半封闭空间是指允许车辆行驶但卫星信号较差的空间,半封闭空间可以是地下隧道、地下停车场、矿井、地下仓库、地下工地等大型空间,还可以是地下管道、下水道、地窖、涵洞、地坑、暗沟等信号遮挡严重的空间,本申请实施例不做具体限定。需要说明的是,半封闭空间并不限于指地面以下的空间,也可以指地面上的允许车辆行驶且卫星信号差的空间,例如:地上隧道、室内停车场、室内仓库等。下文半封闭空间不妨以隧道为例进行方案的示例性阐述,但是本申请实施例不限定半封闭空间仅为隧道。Semi-enclosed space refers to a space that allows vehicles to travel but has poor satellite signals. Semi-enclosed space can be large spaces such as underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, and underground construction sites, as well as underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, and culverts. , Pits, dark trenches and other spaces where signals are severely blocked, and the embodiments of this application do not make specific limitations. It should be noted that the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, indoor warehouses, etc. In the following semi-closed space, a tunnel may be used as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-closed space to only a tunnel.
摄像机,通常情况下,安装于隧道的天花板顶部,用于拍摄隧道中的车辆上的颜色装置获得包含车辆上颜色装置的环境图像,摄像机中还集成有监测装置,以使摄像机可直接对采集到的环境图像进行处理和分析,例如,识别环境图像中的颜色装置、根据颜色装置的图像计算颜色装置与自身摄像机之间的距离等,以监测是否有车辆位于该摄像机对应的定位装置的预设范围内,若有车辆位于该定位装置的预设范围内,则向外发送第二广播信息,第二广播信息指示了位于该定位装置预设范围内的车辆。由于隧道一般较长,可以有多个摄像机在隧道中被间隔安装,相邻的摄像机之间的距离可以是固定的,也可以根据隧道的弯道参数等因地制宜,本申请实施例不做具体限定。The camera, usually installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, is used to shoot the color device on the vehicle in the tunnel to obtain the environmental image including the color device on the vehicle. The camera is also integrated with a monitoring device so that the camera can directly capture Processing and analysis of the environment image, for example, identifying the color device in the environment image, calculating the distance between the color device and its own camera based on the image of the color device, etc., to monitor whether a vehicle is located in the preset positioning device corresponding to the camera Within the range, if a vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device, the second broadcast information is sent out, and the second broadcast information indicates a vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning device. Since the tunnel is generally long, there may be multiple cameras installed at intervals in the tunnel. The distance between adjacent cameras may be fixed, or it may be adjusted according to local conditions such as the curve parameters of the tunnel. The embodiment of this application does not specifically limit it. .
颜色装置位于车辆上,有关于颜色装置的说明可参考图2实施例中的相关叙述,为了说明书的简洁,在此不再赘述。The color device is located on the vehicle. For the description of the color device, please refer to the related description in the embodiment of FIG.
定位装置可以是定位光栅或地磁感应器。定位装置被车辆触发时,定位装置可以向外发送第一广播信息,第一广播信息指示了有车辆触发该定位装置。在一些可能的实施例中,当摄像机与定位装置位于相近位置的不同高度时,第一广播信息中还可以携带该定位装置的位置信息,以辅助车辆实现自身在半封闭空间中的精确定位。The positioning device can be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor. When the positioning device is triggered by a vehicle, the positioning device may send out first broadcast information, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning device. In some possible embodiments, when the camera and the positioning device are located at different heights at similar positions, the first broadcast information may also carry the position information of the positioning device to assist the vehicle in realizing its precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space.
参见图4,基于上文所描述的系统架构,下面描述本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位方法,该方法包括但不限于一下步骤:Referring to FIG. 4, based on the system architecture described above, the following describes a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S101、在车辆进入半封闭空间后,车辆监测自身是否位于半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内。S101. After the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle monitors whether it is within a preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
本申请实施例中,车辆进入半封闭空间后,车辆需监测车辆当前是否位于定位系统的预设范围内,简单来说,即监测车辆是否位于定位系统附近。示例性地,车辆可以通过计算自身与定位系统之间的距离判断自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内。在一些可能的实施例中,车辆还可以通过接收指示了定位系统的预设范围内的车辆的广播信息判断自己是否为该车辆,从未确定自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内。In the embodiment of the present application, after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle needs to monitor whether the vehicle is currently within the preset range of the positioning system. In short, it is to monitor whether the vehicle is located near the positioning system. Exemplarily, the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by calculating the distance between itself and the positioning system. In some possible embodiments, the vehicle may also determine whether it is the vehicle by receiving broadcast information indicating a vehicle within the preset range of the positioning system, and never determines whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system.
需要说明的是,半封闭空间为允许车辆行驶但因信号屏蔽或遮挡导致卫星信号差的空间。半封闭空间可以是地下隧道、地下停车场、矿井、地下仓库、地下工地等大型空间,还可以是地下管道、下水道、地窖、涵洞、地坑、暗沟等信号遮挡严重的空间,本申请实 施例不做具体限定。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,半封闭空间并不指地面以下的空间,也可以指位于地面上的允许车辆行驶且卫星信号差的空间,例如:地上隧道、室内停车场等。It should be noted that a semi-enclosed space is a space that allows vehicles to travel but has poor satellite signals due to signal shielding or occlusion. Semi-enclosed spaces can be large spaces such as underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, and underground construction sites, as well as underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, pits, hidden trenches and other spaces with serious signal obstruction. Examples of this application There is no specific limitation. It should be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, the semi-enclosed space does not refer to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, etc.
另外,本申请实施例中的车辆是一种运输工具的示例,车辆可以泛指小轿车、汽车、旅游大巴车、自行车、电动车等交通工具。在一些可能的实施例中,车辆还可以是电动叉车、矿车、货车等物流运输工具,本申请实施例不做具体限定。In addition, the vehicle in the embodiment of the present application is an example of a means of transportation, and the vehicle can generally refer to transportation means such as cars, automobiles, tourist buses, bicycles, and electric vehicles. In some possible embodiments, the vehicle may also be a logistics transportation tool such as an electric forklift, a mining truck, or a truck, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性地,定位系统包括设置于同一位置不同高度的定位装置和第一颜色装置,车辆通过计算自身与定位系统之间的第一距离判断自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内,具体过程如下:车辆上的摄像机拍摄了包含前方行驶路段中颜色装置的环境图像,通过识别环境图像中的第一颜色装置确定自身与第一颜色装置之间的第二距离,再结合第一颜色装置与车辆上上的位置关系(例如,垂直高度差),确定车辆距离定位装置的第一距离,第一距离也表征车辆距离定位装置所在的定位系统的距离。需要说明的是,在此实施例中,车辆中存储有半封闭空间的地图,地图中包含指示第一颜色装置的离地高度的信息,由于车辆上摄像机的离地高度已知,因此车辆可以获得第一颜色装置与车辆摄像机之间的垂直高度差进而可以计算车辆距离第一颜色装置对应的定位装置的第一距离。例如,若第一距离小于等于预设阈值,则车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内;若第一距离大于预设阈值,则车辆不位于定位系统的预设范围内。Exemplarily, the positioning system includes a positioning device and a first color device that are set at the same location and different heights. The vehicle determines whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by calculating the first distance between itself and the positioning system. The specific process is as follows : The camera on the vehicle captures an environmental image containing the color device in the driving section ahead, determines the second distance between itself and the first color device by identifying the first color device in the environmental image, and then combines the first color device with the vehicle The above position relationship (for example, the vertical height difference) determines the first distance of the vehicle from the positioning device, and the first distance also represents the distance of the vehicle from the positioning system where the positioning device is located. It should be noted that in this embodiment, a semi-enclosed space map is stored in the vehicle, and the map contains information indicating the ground clearance of the first color device. Since the ground clearance of the camera on the vehicle is known, the vehicle can The vertical height difference between the first color device and the vehicle camera is obtained, and the first distance between the vehicle and the positioning device corresponding to the first color device can be calculated. For example, if the first distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system; if the first distance is greater than the preset threshold, the vehicle is not located within the preset range of the positioning system.
需要说明的是,在半封闭空间中设置有多组定位系统的情况下,每组定位系统包含设置于同一位置不同高度的颜色装置和定位装置,不同位置处的颜色装置的颜色或颜色排列顺序不同。其中,不妨以一组定位系统为例,车辆通过摄像机拍摄包含该组定位系统中的颜色装置的第一环境图像后,可以通过识别该颜色装置的颜色来确定该颜色装置,从而也就知道地图中该颜色装置的相关信息。具体地,车辆从第一环境图像中获得该颜色装置颜色的解析结果,该解析结果指示了颜色装置的颜色和顺序,车辆根据该解析结果与半封闭空间的地图中各颜色装置进行比对,从而车辆可以确定识别出的颜色装置在半封闭空间中的编号,也可从地图中获得该颜色装置的离地高度,车辆即可进一步计算自身车辆与该颜色装置对应的定位装置之间的第一距离。It should be noted that when there are multiple sets of positioning systems in a semi-enclosed space, each set of positioning systems includes color devices and positioning devices set at the same location and different heights, and the colors or color arrangement sequence of the color devices at different locations different. Among them, let’s take a group of positioning systems as an example. After a vehicle captures a first environmental image containing the color devices in the group of positioning systems through a camera, the color device can be identified by identifying the color of the color device, so that the map is also known. Information about the color device in the. Specifically, the vehicle obtains the analysis result of the color of the color device from the first environment image, the analysis result indicates the color and order of the color device, and the vehicle compares the analysis result with each color device in the semi-enclosed space map according to the analysis result. Therefore, the vehicle can determine the number of the recognized color device in the semi-enclosed space, and can also obtain the ground height of the color device from the map. The vehicle can further calculate the position between its own vehicle and the positioning device corresponding to the color device. A distance.
需要说明的是,在定位系统包括颜色装置和定位装置时,定位系统中的颜色装置和定位装置可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的同一平面上,如同一位置同一高度、同一位置不同高度,其中,同一位置是指在同一平面上;除此之外,颜色装置和定位装置还可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的不同平面上,但颜色装置和定位装置所在平面之间的距离不应相差太远。本申请对同一定位系统中的颜色装置和定位装置在半封闭空间中的安装位置不做具体限定。It should be noted that when the positioning system includes a color device and a positioning device, the color device and positioning device in the positioning system can be set on the same plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle, such as the same location at the same height, and the same location at different heights. , The same position refers to the same plane; in addition, the color device and the positioning device can also be set on different planes perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle, but the distance between the color device and the plane where the positioning device is located should not be too different Far. This application does not specifically limit the installation positions of the color device and the positioning device in the same positioning system in the semi-enclosed space.
需要说明的是,在颜色装置设置于半封闭空间中时,在此情况下,车辆通过计算第一距离监测自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内,车辆中存储的半封闭空间的地图可以是车辆预先存储的,即可以是车辆在进入半封闭空间前从服务器或者半封闭空间入口处的路侧单元或者已进入半封闭空间中的车辆等装置中获取的,也可以是车辆在出厂时就自带了导航地图,在此情况下,车辆在进入某半封闭空间前,可以利用自身的GPS定位确定当前距离自身车辆最近的半封闭空间,最后从内置的导航地图中获取半封闭空间的地图。在一些 可能的实施例中,车辆也可以在进入半封闭空间后但识别半封闭空间中的颜色装置之前或者车辆开始监测自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内之前,从服务器上下载半封闭空间的地图或者接收半封闭空间中已获得地图的前方车辆发送的地图,本申请不做具体限定。It should be noted that when the color device is set in a semi-enclosed space, in this case, the vehicle monitors whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system by calculating the first distance, and the map of the semi-enclosed space stored in the vehicle may be The vehicle pre-stored can be obtained from the server or the roadside unit at the entrance of the semi-enclosed space or the vehicle that has entered the semi-enclosed space before the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space. It comes with a navigation map. In this case, before the vehicle enters a semi-enclosed space, it can use its GPS positioning to determine the current semi-enclosed space closest to its own vehicle, and finally obtain the semi-enclosed space map from the built-in navigation map . In some possible embodiments, the vehicle may also download the semi-enclosed space from the server after entering the semi-enclosed space but before identifying the color device in the semi-enclosed space or before the vehicle starts to monitor whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system This application does not specifically limit the map or the map sent by the vehicle in front that receives the map in the semi-enclosed space.
需要说明的是,在颜色装置设置于车辆上时,在此情况下,车辆通过接收指示了定位系统的预设范围内的车辆的广播信息(即下文中的第二广播信息)监测自身是否在定位系统的预设范围内,车辆获取半封闭空间的地图的时间点除了可以是上述涉及的情形外,还包括车辆可以在位于某定位系统的预设范围内时才从服务器或者半封闭空间中的其他车辆等处获取或下载半封闭空间的地图。总之,在颜色装置位于车辆上时,车辆获取半封闭空间的地图的时间需在车辆执行S102中获取地图中定位系统在半封闭空间的位置信息的时间点之前即可。It should be noted that when the color device is installed on the vehicle, in this case, the vehicle monitors whether it is in the vehicle by receiving the broadcast information indicating the vehicle within the preset range of the positioning system (that is, the second broadcast information hereinafter). Within the preset range of the positioning system, the time point at which the vehicle obtains the map of the semi-enclosed space can be in addition to the above-mentioned situations. It also includes that the vehicle can only get from the server or the semi-enclosed space when it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system. Obtain or download the map of the semi-enclosed space from other vehicles and other places. In short, when the color device is located on the vehicle, the time for the vehicle to acquire the map of the semi-enclosed space needs to be before the time point when the vehicle executes S102 to acquire the location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space in the map.
示例性地,半封闭空间设置有至少一组定位系统,每组定位系统包括设置于同一位置不同高度的摄像机和定位装置,且半封闭空间未设置颜色装置,但进入半封闭空间的车辆上设置有颜色装置,不同车辆的颜色装置的颜色或颜色排列顺序不同,车辆监测自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内的方式还可以是:车辆接收第二广播信息,第二广播信息指示了位于该定位系统的预设范围内的车辆,车辆根据第二广播信息可以确定自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内。需要说明的是,第二广播信息可以是服务器发送的,在一些可能的实施例中,若摄像机集成有图像处理分析计算等功能,第二广播信息也可以由直接由半封闭空间中的摄像机发送,本申请不做具体限定。Exemplarily, a semi-enclosed space is provided with at least one set of positioning systems, each set of positioning systems includes cameras and positioning devices set at the same location and different heights, and the semi-enclosed space is not provided with a color device, but is installed on a vehicle entering the semi-enclosed space There are color devices. The color or color arrangement sequence of the color devices of different vehicles is different. The way for the vehicle to monitor whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system can also be: the vehicle receives the second broadcast information, and the second broadcast information indicates that it is located in the For vehicles within the preset range of the positioning system, the vehicle can determine whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information. It should be noted that the second broadcast information may be sent by the server. In some possible embodiments, if the camera integrates functions such as image processing, analysis and calculation, the second broadcast information may also be directly sent by a camera in a semi-enclosed space. , This application does not make specific restrictions.
需要说明的是,在定位系统包括摄像机和定位装置时,定位系统中的摄像机和定位装置可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的同一平面上,如同一位置同一高度、同一位置不同高度,其中,同一位置是指在同一平面上;除此之外,摄像机和定位装置还可以设置在与车辆行驶方向垂直的不同平面上,但摄像机和定位装置所在平面之间的距离不应相差太远。本申请对同一定位系统中的摄像机和定位装置在半封闭空间中的安装位置不做具体限定。一具体实施中,第二广播信息指示了颜色装置的颜色或颜色排列顺序,且第二广播信息中所指的颜色装置为位于该定位系统的预设范围内的车辆的颜色装置,本车辆可以根据第二广播信息指示的颜色或顺序与本车辆的颜色装置进行匹配,若匹配成功,即说明本车辆位于该定位系统的预设范围内;若匹配失败,则说明本车辆不位于该定位系统的预设范围内。It should be noted that when the positioning system includes a camera and a positioning device, the camera and positioning device in the positioning system can be set on the same plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle. The position refers to the same plane; in addition, the camera and the positioning device can also be set on different planes perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle, but the distance between the plane where the camera and the positioning device are located should not be too far apart. This application does not specifically limit the installation positions of the camera and the positioning device in the same positioning system in the semi-enclosed space. In a specific implementation, the second broadcast information indicates the color or color arrangement sequence of the color device, and the color device referred to in the second broadcast information is the color device of a vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning system, and the vehicle can Match the color or sequence indicated by the second broadcast information with the color device of the vehicle. If the matching is successful, it means that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system; if the matching fails, it means that the vehicle is not located in the positioning system. Within the preset range.
需要说明的是,在半封闭空间设置有多个颜色装置的情况下,颜色装置可以设置于半封闭空间中的天花板或墙壁的高处上,以方便车辆的摄像机采集到。半封闭空间的颜色装置的数量与定位装置的数量相同,且颜色装置与定位装置一一对应。为了提高颜色装置的识别度,通常使不同位置处的颜色装置具有不同的颜色或者不同的颜色排列顺序,且相邻的两个或多个颜色装置在视觉上存在明显的差异,从而大大降低识别不同位置处颜色装置的误码率,实现车辆在半封闭空间的定位需求。在一些可能的实施例中,若半封闭空间中有两个颜色装置的颜色或者颜色排列组合相同,则这两个颜色装置常被设置于半封闭空间中间隔较远的两处,例如:隧道的入口和出口。It should be noted that when multiple color devices are provided in the semi-enclosed space, the color devices can be set on the ceiling or the height of the wall in the semi-enclosed space to facilitate the collection by the vehicle's camera. The number of color devices in the semi-closed space is the same as the number of positioning devices, and the color devices and the positioning devices correspond one-to-one. In order to improve the recognition of color devices, color devices at different positions are usually made to have different colors or different color arrangement sequences, and there are obvious visual differences between two or more adjacent color devices, which greatly reduces the recognition. The bit error rate of the color device at different positions can realize the positioning requirement of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space. In some possible embodiments, if there are two color devices in the semi-enclosed space with the same color or color arrangement and combination, the two color devices are often set in two places far apart in the semi-enclosed space, such as a tunnel. Entrance and exit.
示例性地,颜色装置可以是标识灯组,每个标识灯组包含至少一个标识灯或其他可发光器件,标识灯或可发光器件可以是白炽灯、卤素灯、荧光灯、节能灯、LED灯、高压钠灯、金卤灯、无极灯、霓虹灯等,且每个标识灯或可发光器件的发光颜色是可以根据颜色 编码调控的。因此,不同位置处的颜色装置的显示颜色是预先根据颜色编码设置好的。Exemplarily, the color device may be an identification lamp group, and each identification lamp group includes at least one identification lamp or other light-emitting device. The identification lamp or the light-emitting device may be an incandescent lamp, a halogen lamp, a fluorescent lamp, an energy-saving lamp, an LED lamp, High-pressure sodium lamps, metal halide lamps, electrodeless lamps, neon lamps, etc., and the light-emitting color of each sign or light-emitting device can be adjusted according to color coding. Therefore, the display colors of the color devices at different positions are set in advance according to the color code.
示例性地,颜色装置也可以是带颜色的金属板,金属板的数量至少为一个。当金属板的数量为多个时,则该颜色装置即同时显示多种不同的颜色。Exemplarily, the color device may also be a colored metal plate, and the number of the metal plate is at least one. When the number of metal plates is multiple, the color device displays multiple different colors at the same time.
需要说明的是,颜色装置都有对应的颜色编码,颜色编码指示了该颜色装置的颜色和/或颜色排列顺序,颜色装置的颜色编码存储于半封闭空间的地图中。除了标识灯组、带颜色的金属板外,颜色装置还可以是其他带颜色的装置,本申请是实施例不做具体限定。It should be noted that each color device has a corresponding color code. The color code indicates the color and/or color arrangement sequence of the color device. The color code of the color device is stored in a semi-closed space map. In addition to the identification lamp group and the colored metal plate, the color device may also be other colored devices, which are not specifically limited by the embodiments of the present application.
S102、在车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内时,车辆获取地图中定位系统在半封闭空间的位置信息。S102. When the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system, the vehicle obtains position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map.
本申请实施例中,在车辆确定自身位于某定位系统的预设范围内时,即说明本车辆触发了该定位系统,车辆即可从半封闭空间的地图中获取该定位系统在半封闭空间的位置信息。在此情况下,半封闭空间的地图中存储有定位系统的位置信息。需要说明的是,车辆获取半封闭空间的地图的方式以及时间可参考S101中的相关描述,为了说明书的简洁,在此不再赘述。In the embodiment of this application, when the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system, it means that the vehicle has triggered the positioning system, and the vehicle can obtain the positioning system's location in the semi-enclosed space from the map of the semi-enclosed space. location information. In this case, the location information of the positioning system is stored in the map of the semi-enclosed space. It should be noted that the manner and time for the vehicle to obtain the map of the semi-enclosed space can refer to the relevant description in S101, and for the sake of brevity of the description, it will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,所谓的位置信息可以是该定位系统在任意坐标系下的坐标值,例如,该定位系统在世界大地坐标系(Word Geodetic System 1984,WGS84)中对应的由经度、纬度和海拔组成的三维坐标,也可以是自然坐标系下的X坐标、Y坐标和Z坐标组成的三维坐标或者其他坐标系下的坐标。在一些可能的实施例中,若半封闭空间为笔直的具有两出口的空间(例如,隧道等),在此情况下,位置信息也可以是指示了该定位系统距离半封闭空间入口或者出口处的距离。It should be noted that the so-called position information can be the coordinate value of the positioning system in any coordinate system. For example, the positioning system corresponds to the longitude, latitude and altitude in the world geodetic coordinate system (Word Geodetic System 1984, WGS84). The composed three-dimensional coordinates may also be three-dimensional coordinates composed of X, Y, and Z coordinates in the natural coordinate system or coordinates in other coordinate systems. In some possible embodiments, if the semi-enclosed space is a straight space with two exits (for example, a tunnel, etc.), in this case, the position information may also indicate that the positioning system is away from the entrance or exit of the semi-enclosed space. the distance.
本申请的一种实施例中,在半封闭空间中的每组定位系统包括颜色装置和定位装置、摄像机位于车辆的情况下,车辆根据计算出的第一距离(摄像机与颜色装置对应的定位装置之间的距离)确定自身位于定位系统的预设范围内时,即可认为本车辆触发了识别出的颜色装置对应的定位装置,故车辆可从半封闭空间的地图中获取该组定位装置和颜色装置所在的定位系统的位置信息。In an embodiment of the present application, each group of positioning systems in a semi-enclosed space includes a color device and a positioning device, and when the camera is located in the vehicle, the vehicle is based on the calculated first distance (the positioning device corresponding to the camera and the color device). When it is determined that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, it can be considered that the vehicle has triggered the positioning device corresponding to the identified color device. Therefore, the vehicle can obtain the set of positioning devices and the positioning device from the map in the semi-enclosed space. Location information of the positioning system where the color device is located.
需要说明的是,在半封闭空间中设置有多个颜色装置(即有多组定位系统)的情况下,由于半封闭空间中不同位置处的颜色装置的颜色和/或颜色排列顺序不同,即不同位置处的颜色装置的颜色编码不同,因此车辆根据识别出的颜色装置与半封闭空间的地图中各颜色装置进行比对,即可确定识别出的颜色装置在半封闭空间中的编号,若车辆确定自身位于该颜色装置对应的定位装置的预设范围内,即可根据该颜色装置的编号在半封闭空间的地图中获得该编号对应的定位系统的位置信息。It should be noted that when multiple color devices are provided in a semi-enclosed space (that is, there are multiple sets of positioning systems), since the colors and/or color arrangement sequences of the color devices at different positions in the semi-enclosed space are different, that is, The color codes of the color devices at different locations are different. Therefore, the vehicle compares the identified color devices with each color device in the semi-enclosed space map to determine the number of the identified color device in the semi-enclosed space. When the vehicle determines that it is located within the preset range of the positioning device corresponding to the color device, the position information of the positioning system corresponding to the color device can be obtained on the map of the semi-enclosed space according to the number of the color device.
本申请的另一种实施例中,在半封闭空间中的每组定位系统包括摄像机和定位装置、颜色装置位于车辆的情况下,车辆接收的第二广播信息中指示了位于该定位系统的预设范围内的车辆,示例性地,即第二广播信息中携带不仅携带有位于定位系统的预设范围内的车辆的颜色装置的颜色编码,该颜色编码指示了这些车辆上颜色装置的颜色和顺序,第二广播信息中还携带有颜色装置所在的定位系统的编号,以使车辆在与第二广播信息中指示的颜色装置匹配成功后,即说明本车辆位于该定位系统的预设范围内,可以根据该颜色装置所在的定位系统的编号从半封闭空间的地图中获取该定位系统在半封闭空间中位置信息。In another embodiment of the present application, in the case that each group of positioning systems in a semi-enclosed space includes a camera and a positioning device, and the color device is located in the vehicle, the second broadcast information received by the vehicle indicates the preset location of the positioning system. Set the vehicles within the range, for example, that is, the second broadcast message carries color codes not only for the color devices of the vehicles located within the preset range of the positioning system, and the color codes indicate the colors and colors of the color devices on these vehicles. In order, the second broadcast information also carries the number of the positioning system where the color device is located, so that after the vehicle is successfully matched with the color device indicated in the second broadcast information, it means that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system , The position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space can be obtained from the map of the semi-enclosed space according to the number of the positioning system where the color device is located.
在一些可能的实施例中,若车辆确定自身当前位于某定位系统的预设范围内,也可认为是本车辆已接近该定位系统但并未在该定位系统对应的位置处触发该定位系统,当且仅当该车辆接收到该定位系统被触发时发送的第一广播信息时,第一广播信息指示了有车辆在该定位系统对应的位置处触发该定位系统,则本车辆可以确定是自身触发了该定位系统,车辆可从半封闭空间的地图中获取该定位系统的位置信息,以辅助车辆实现精确定位。In some possible embodiments, if the vehicle determines that it is currently within the preset range of a certain positioning system, it can also be considered that the vehicle has approached the positioning system but has not triggered the positioning system at the corresponding position of the positioning system. If and only when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information sent when the positioning system is triggered, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning system at the location corresponding to the positioning system, the vehicle can be determined to be itself When the positioning system is triggered, the vehicle can obtain the position information of the positioning system from the map in the semi-enclosed space to assist the vehicle in achieving precise positioning.
需要说明的是,考虑到车辆的车长、车辆之间的安全距离等,对半封闭空间中的每条车道来说,定位系统的预设范围内最多仅能容纳一辆车,因此,对于某个定位系统来说,不会出现同一车道上的多辆车同时触发同一定位系统,即车辆不会误判是否是自身触发该定位系统。It should be noted that considering the length of the vehicle and the safety distance between the vehicles, for each lane in the semi-enclosed space, only one vehicle can be accommodated within the preset range of the positioning system. Therefore, for For a certain positioning system, multiple vehicles in the same lane will not trigger the same positioning system at the same time, that is, the vehicle will not misjudge whether the positioning system is triggered by itself.
在一些可能的实施例中,半封闭空间中的地图中标注有表征颜色装置和其对应的定位装置所在的定位系统的位置的编号,但没有具体的位置信息,在此情况下,第一广播信息中还可以携带有定位装置的位置信息与该定位装置的编号,以使车辆将识别出的颜色装置对应的编号与第一广播信息中定位装置的编号匹配,若匹配成功,则车辆可以将第一广播信息中定位装置的位置信息作为该定位装置所在的定位系统在半封闭空间中的位置信息。In some possible embodiments, the map in the semi-enclosed space is marked with a number that characterizes the location of the color device and the location system where the corresponding positioning device is located, but there is no specific location information. In this case, the first broadcast The information can also carry the location information of the positioning device and the number of the positioning device, so that the vehicle can match the number corresponding to the identified color device with the number of the positioning device in the first broadcast information. If the matching is successful, the vehicle can The position information of the positioning device in the first broadcast information is used as the position information of the positioning system in which the positioning device is located in the semi-enclosed space.
在一些可能的实施例中,若半封闭空间中的每组定位系统包括定位装置和颜色装置,但定位装置和颜色装置位于相近位置的不同高度,且地图中仅显示了该组定位系统中颜色装置对应的位置信息,在此情况下,在车辆确定位于某定位系统的预设范围内时,车辆还需接收到该定位系统中的定位装置被触发时发送的第一广播信息,第一广播信息中携带有该定位装置的位置信息和编号,车辆即可从第一广播信息中获得该定位装置的位置信息,从而也就获得了该定位装置所在的定位系统在半封闭空间的位置信息。In some possible embodiments, if each set of positioning systems in a semi-enclosed space includes a positioning device and a color device, but the positioning device and the color device are located at different heights in similar positions, and only the colors in the set of positioning systems are displayed on the map. The location information corresponding to the device. In this case, when the vehicle is determined to be within the preset range of a positioning system, the vehicle also needs to receive the first broadcast information sent when the positioning device in the positioning system is triggered. The information carries the position information and number of the positioning device, and the vehicle can obtain the position information of the positioning device from the first broadcast information, thereby obtaining the position information of the positioning system where the positioning device is located in the semi-enclosed space.
需要说明的是,定位系统中的定位装置可以是定位光栅或者地磁感应器或者其他可以检测是否有车辆通过的装置。It should be noted that the positioning device in the positioning system may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor or other devices that can detect whether a vehicle passes by.
S103、车辆根据定位系统的位置信息在地图中对自身进行定位。S103. The vehicle locates itself on the map according to the location information of the positioning system.
本申请的一种实施例中,若车辆确定自身位于某定位系统的预设范围内,且车辆获得了该定位系统在半封闭空间中的位置信息,则车辆可以根据该定位系统的位置信息在半封闭空间的地图中对自身进行定位。具体地,车辆将该定位系统的位置信息作为本车辆的位置信息,从而实现车辆在半封闭空间中的定位。In an embodiment of the present application, if the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system, and the vehicle obtains the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle can be based on the position information of the positioning system. Position itself in a semi-enclosed space map. Specifically, the vehicle uses the position information of the positioning system as the position information of the vehicle, so as to realize the positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space.
本申请的另一种实施例中,若车辆确定自身位于某定位系统的预设范围内,且车辆接收到该定位系统对应的定位装置被触发时发送的第一广播信息,则车辆可根据第一广播信息确定该定位系统的位置信息,并结合地图实现自身的精确定位。具体地,车辆将该定位系统的位置信息作为本车辆的位置信息,从而实现车辆在半封闭空间中的定位。In another embodiment of the present application, if the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of a certain positioning system, and the vehicle receives the first broadcast information sent when the positioning device corresponding to the positioning system is triggered, the vehicle can follow the A broadcast information determines the location information of the positioning system, and combines it with a map to realize its own precise positioning. Specifically, the vehicle uses the position information of the positioning system as the position information of the vehicle, so as to realize the positioning of the vehicle in the semi-enclosed space.
本申请的另一实施例中,定位系统也可以在定位系统被触发后的一段时间再发送第一广播信息,则车辆接收到的来自该定位系统的第一广播信息中携带有触发时刻和该定位系统的位置信息,若车辆当前位于该定位系统的预设范围内,则可以根据第一广播信息中的触发时、位置信息、当前时刻以及车辆的运动信息计算车辆当前的位置信息,从而实现车辆在半封闭空间的定位。需要说明的是,触发时刻用于指示定位系统被车辆触发的时刻。In another embodiment of the present application, the positioning system may also send the first broadcast information after a period of time after the positioning system is triggered, and the first broadcast information received by the vehicle from the positioning system carries the trigger time and the The position information of the positioning system. If the vehicle is currently within the preset range of the positioning system, the current position information of the vehicle can be calculated according to the trigger time, position information, current time and the movement information of the vehicle in the first broadcast information, so as to achieve The positioning of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space. It should be noted that the trigger moment is used to indicate the moment when the positioning system is triggered by the vehicle.
需要说明的是,定位系统发送第一广播信息的时刻和车辆接收到来自该定位系统的第一广播信息的时刻,这两个时刻之间的时间差可以忽略不计。It should be noted that the time difference between the time when the positioning system sends the first broadcast information and the time when the vehicle receives the first broadcast information from the positioning system can be ignored.
需要说明的是,第一广播信息中携带有定位装置的编号,由于第一广播信息承载于广播信息中被发送,可能导致当有某辆车触发了某定位装置时,该半封闭空间中的所有车辆都接收到该定位装置发送的第一广播信息,但接收到的第一广播信息对自身车辆来说是否有用还有待判断。例如,若车辆当前位于第一定位装置的预设范围内时接收到第一定位装置发送的第一广播信息,则该第一广播信息对该车辆有用;若车辆当前不位于第一定位装置的预设范围内但接收到第一定位装置发送的第一广播信息,则该第一广播信息对该车辆无用;若当前车辆位于第一定位装置的预设范围内时,同时接收到来自第一定位装置的第一广播信息和来自第二定位装置的第一广播信息,则来自第一定位装置的第一广播信息对该车辆有用,来自第二定位装置的第一广播信息对该车辆无用。需要说明的是,在车辆确定第一广播信息对自身无用时,车辆可直接丢弃对自身无用的第一广播信息。It should be noted that the first broadcast information carries the number of the positioning device. Since the first broadcast information is carried in the broadcast information and is sent, it may cause that when a certain vehicle triggers a certain positioning device, the location in the semi-enclosed space All vehicles have received the first broadcast information sent by the positioning device, but whether the received first broadcast information is useful for the own vehicle remains to be determined. For example, if the vehicle receives the first broadcast information sent by the first positioning device when the vehicle is currently located within the preset range of the first positioning device, the first broadcast information is useful to the vehicle; if the vehicle is not currently located in the first positioning device’s Within the preset range but the first broadcast information sent by the first positioning device is received, the first broadcast information is useless for the vehicle; if the current vehicle is within the preset range of the first positioning device, the first broadcast information is also received from the first positioning device. If the first broadcast information from the positioning device and the first broadcast information from the second positioning device are used, the first broadcast information from the first positioning device is useful for the vehicle, and the first broadcast information from the second positioning device is not useful for the vehicle. It should be noted that when the vehicle determines that the first broadcast information is useless to itself, the vehicle may directly discard the first broadcast information that is useless to itself.
在车辆实现本次定位后但未到达下一个定位系统的预设范围内的路段中,车辆还可以利用惯性导航技术实现自身在该路段中的导航,相关描述可参考下文图5中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。After the vehicle has achieved this positioning but has not reached the preset range of the next positioning system, the vehicle can also use inertial navigation technology to realize its own navigation on the road segment. For related descriptions, please refer to the related description in Figure 5 below. , I won’t repeat it here.
可以看到,实施本申请实施例,在卫星信号不佳的半封闭空间中,通过在半封闭空间中设置至少一组定位系统辅助车辆实现在半封闭空间中的精确定位,当车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内和/或接收到指示该定位系统被触发的信息时,车辆即可将对应的定位系统的位置信息作为自身的位置信息实现精确定位,有效解决了在卫星信号被遮挡或者屏蔽的隧道、地下等场景下车辆无法定位或定位不准的问题,提升了车辆在信号不佳的半封闭空间中定位的鲁棒性,降低了半封闭空间中车辆定位的施工成本。It can be seen that in the implementation of the embodiments of this application, in a semi-enclosed space with poor satellite signals, at least one set of positioning systems are provided in the semi-enclosed space to assist the vehicle in achieving precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space. When the vehicle is located in the positioning system The vehicle can use the location information of the corresponding positioning system as its own location information to achieve precise positioning within the preset range of the vehicle and/or when receiving information indicating that the positioning system is triggered. This effectively solves the problem of obstructing or shielding satellite signals The problem of inaccurate or inaccurate positioning of vehicles in tunnels, underground and other scenarios improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces with poor signals, and reduces the construction cost of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces.
参见图5,基于上文实施所描述的系统架构,下面描述本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位方法。需要说明的是,图5实施例可以独立于图4实施例,也可以是对图4实施例的补充。该方法包括但不限于一下步骤:Referring to FIG. 5, based on the system architecture described in the above implementation, the following describes a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It should be noted that the embodiment in FIG. 5 may be independent of the embodiment in FIG. 4, or may be a supplement to the embodiment in FIG. 4. The method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S201、车辆进入半封闭空间前,获取半封闭空间的地图。S201: Before the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, obtain a map of the semi-enclosed space.
本申请实施例中,车辆在进入半封闭空间之前,需先获取半封闭空间的地图,该地图中包含安装于半封闭空间内的定位系统在半封闭空间中的位置信息。需要说明的是,定位系统用于感应是否有车辆通过,定位系统包括定位装置,定位装置可以是定位光栅或者地磁感应器。In the embodiment of the present application, before the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, a map of the semi-enclosed space needs to be obtained first, and the map contains the position information of the positioning system installed in the semi-enclosed space in the semi-enclosed space. It should be noted that the positioning system is used to sense whether a vehicle passes by, and the positioning system includes a positioning device, which may be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
需要说明的是,半封闭空间为允许车辆行驶但因屏蔽或遮挡导致卫星信号差的空间。半封闭空间可以是地下隧道、地下停车场、矿井、地下仓库、地下工地等大型空间,还可以是地下管道、下水道、地窖、涵洞、地坑、暗沟等信号遮挡严重的空间,本申请实施例不做具体限定。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,半封闭空间并不限于指地面以下的空间,也可以指位于地面上的允许车辆行驶且卫星信号差的空间,例如:地上隧道、室内停车场等。It should be noted that a semi-enclosed space is a space that allows vehicles to travel but has poor satellite signals due to shielding or occlusion. Semi-enclosed spaces can be large spaces such as underground tunnels, underground parking lots, mines, underground warehouses, and underground construction sites, as well as underground pipelines, sewers, cellars, culverts, pits, hidden trenches and other spaces with serious signal obstruction. Examples of this application There is no specific limitation. It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, the semi-enclosed space is not limited to the space below the ground, but can also refer to the space on the ground that allows vehicles to travel and has poor satellite signals, such as ground tunnels, indoor parking lots, etc.
另外,本申请实施例中的车辆是一种运输工具的示例,车辆可以泛指小轿车、汽车、旅游大巴车、自行车、电动车等交通工具。在一些可能的实施例中,车辆还可以是矿车、货车等物流运输工具,本申请实施例不做具体限定。In addition, the vehicle in the embodiment of the present application is an example of a means of transportation, and the vehicle can generally refer to transportation means such as cars, automobiles, tourist buses, bicycles, and electric vehicles. In some possible embodiments, the vehicle may also be a logistics transportation tool such as a mining cart, a truck, etc., which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
示例性地,车辆获取半封闭空间的地图的方式可以是从服务器获取。具体地,车辆在 进入半封闭空间前,车辆向服务器发送第一请求,第一请求用于请求服务器发送半封闭空间的地图,第一请求中携带有车辆当前所在的位置信息,服务器根据接收到的第一请求确定车辆附近的半封闭空间,并向车辆发送车辆即将进入的半封闭空间的地图。Exemplarily, the way for the vehicle to obtain the map of the semi-enclosed space may be obtained from the server. Specifically, before the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle sends a first request to the server. The first request is used to request the server to send a map of the semi-enclosed space. The first request carries the current location information of the vehicle. The first request determines the semi-enclosed space near the vehicle, and sends the vehicle a map of the semi-enclosed space that the vehicle is about to enter.
示例性地,车辆还可以通过自身的导航系统获取半封闭空间的地图。具体地,车辆在进入半封闭空间前,通过自身的导航系统确定当前的位置信息,例如,可以确定自身位置附近的半封闭空间的名称,然后从导航系统的地图中获取对应的半封闭空间的地图即可。Exemplarily, the vehicle can also obtain a map of a semi-enclosed space through its own navigation system. Specifically, before the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, the current location information is determined through its own navigation system. For example, the name of the semi-enclosed space near its location can be determined, and then the corresponding semi-enclosed space information can be obtained from the map of the navigation system. The map is fine.
在一些可能的实施例中,车辆也可以从半封闭空间入口处的路侧单元处获取地图,或者还可以通过接收已进入半封闭空间中的其他车辆发送的地图来获取地图。在一些可能的实施例中,半封闭空间的地图还可以是车辆出厂时自带的且存储于车辆的存储器中,本申请实施例不做限定。In some possible embodiments, the vehicle may also obtain the map from the roadside unit at the entrance of the semi-enclosed space, or may also obtain the map by receiving the map sent by other vehicles that have entered the semi-enclosed space. In some possible embodiments, the map of the semi-enclosed space may also be carried by the vehicle when it leaves the factory and stored in the memory of the vehicle, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
S202、在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测车辆是否位于定位系统的预设范围内。本步骤具体可参考图4实施例中S101的相关描述,这里不再赘述。S202. After the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, monitor whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S101 in the embodiment of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
S203、在定位系统被触发时,定位系统向外发送第一广播信息。S203: When the positioning system is triggered, the positioning system sends the first broadcast information to the outside.
本申请实施例中,定位系统包括定位装置,所谓定位系统被触发是指有车辆很接近该定位装或有车辆通过该定位装置或有车辆位于该定位装置处,导致该定位装置被触发。在定位系统被触发时,定位系统向半封闭空间中的所有车辆发送第一广播信息,第一广播信息用于指示有车辆触发了该定位系统,例如,在半封闭空间设置有多组定位系统的情况下,第一广播信息中可以携带该定位系统的编号。第一广播信息可用于辅助车辆判断是否是自身触发了该定位系统。需要说明的是,定位系统包括定位装置,定位装置可以是定位光栅或者地磁感应器,定位装置用于感应是否有车辆通过。In the embodiment of the present application, the positioning system includes a positioning device. The so-called positioning system being triggered means that a vehicle is very close to the positioning device, a vehicle passes through the positioning device, or a vehicle is located at the positioning device, causing the positioning device to be triggered. When the positioning system is triggered, the positioning system sends first broadcast information to all vehicles in the semi-enclosed space. The first broadcast information is used to indicate that a vehicle has triggered the positioning system. For example, there are multiple sets of positioning systems in the semi-enclosed space. In the case of, the number of the positioning system may be carried in the first broadcast information. The first broadcast information can be used to assist the vehicle in determining whether the positioning system is triggered by itself. It should be noted that the positioning system includes a positioning device, which can be a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor, and the positioning device is used to sense whether a vehicle passes by.
需要说明的是,定位系统可以在自身被车辆触发时立即发送第一广播信息,定位系统也可以在定位系统被触发后的一段时间内再发送第一广播信息,本申请不做具体限定。在一些可能的实施例中,第一广播信息中还可以携带触发时刻,触发时刻用于指示定位系统被触发的时刻,以使车辆根据触发时刻、定位系统的位置信息、当前时刻以及运动信息计算车辆当前的位置从而实现定位。It should be noted that the positioning system can immediately send the first broadcast information when it is triggered by the vehicle, and the positioning system can also send the first broadcast information within a period of time after the positioning system is triggered, which is not specifically limited in this application. In some possible embodiments, the first broadcast information may also carry the trigger moment, which is used to indicate the moment when the positioning system is triggered, so that the vehicle can calculate according to the trigger moment, the position information of the positioning system, the current moment, and the movement information. The current position of the vehicle can thus be positioned.
示例性地,定位装置可以是定位光栅,定位光栅可用于发射激光或者红外线,定位光栅通常设置于半封闭空间车道的侧边。具体地,在有车辆经过时,车辆阻挡了定位光栅发射的激光或红外线,定位光栅根据反射的激光或红外线的强度变化判断出有车辆经过,即有车辆触发该定位光栅,定位光栅感应到后,即向附近所有车辆发送第一广播信息。在半封闭空间中设有多个定位光栅时,第一广播信息中携带了被触发的定位光栅的编号。Exemplarily, the positioning device may be a positioning grating, which can be used to emit laser or infrared rays, and the positioning grating is usually arranged on the side of a semi-enclosed space lane. Specifically, when a vehicle passes by, the vehicle blocks the laser or infrared light emitted by the positioning grating, and the positioning grating determines that there is a vehicle passing by according to the intensity change of the reflected laser or infrared, that is, a vehicle triggers the positioning grating, and the positioning grating senses it. , Which sends the first broadcast message to all nearby vehicles. When there are multiple positioning gratings in the semi-enclosed space, the first broadcast message carries the number of the triggered positioning grating.
示例性地,定位装置可以是地磁感应器,地磁感应器可用于检测车辆的存在,地磁感应器一般埋设于半封闭空间设置的车道中。具体地,在有车辆通过时,车辆切割地磁感应器的磁感线引起磁场的变化,地磁传感器会随之感应到有车辆通过,即说明该地磁感应器被触发,地磁感应器感应到后,即向附近所有车辆发送第一广播信息。在半封闭空间中设有多个地磁感应器时,第一广播信息中携带了被触发的地磁感应器的编号。Exemplarily, the positioning device may be a geomagnetic sensor, which may be used to detect the presence of a vehicle, and the geomagnetic sensor is generally buried in a lane set in a semi-enclosed space. Specifically, when a vehicle passes by, the vehicle cuts the magnetic line of induction of the geomagnetic sensor to cause a change in the magnetic field. The geomagnetic sensor will then sense that a vehicle passes, which means that the geomagnetic sensor is triggered. After the geomagnetic sensor detects it, That is, the first broadcast message is sent to all nearby vehicles. When there are multiple geomagnetic sensors in a semi-enclosed space, the first broadcast message carries the number of the geomagnetic sensor that is triggered.
需要说明的是,在半封闭空间较大时,可以根据实际需要在半封闭空间中间隔设置多个定位系统,相邻两个定位系统之间的距离可以是固定的,也可以根据半封闭空间的内部构造因地制宜,每组定位系统的精确位置预先被测量过,每个定位系统都有唯一的编号, 且其编号与其位置一一对应。定位系统的编号以及位置信息可以存储于半封闭空间的地图中,也可以仅定位系统的编号存储于半封闭空间的地图中,而定位装置的位置信息和编号可内含于第一广播信息中被广播。It should be noted that when the semi-enclosed space is large, multiple positioning systems can be arranged in the semi-enclosed space at intervals according to actual needs. The distance between two adjacent positioning systems can be fixed or based on the semi-enclosed space. The internal structure of the system is adapted to local conditions. The precise position of each group of positioning systems has been measured in advance, and each positioning system has a unique number, and its number corresponds to its position one-to-one. The number and position information of the positioning system can be stored in a semi-enclosed space map, or only the number of the positioning system can be stored in a semi-enclosed space map, and the position information and number of the positioning device can be included in the first broadcast information Was broadcast.
需要说明的是,第一广播信息除了可由定位装置发送外,在一些可能的实施例中,在有车辆触发某定位系统时,服务器可以直接感应到半封闭空间中的哪一个定位系统被触发,服务器可以向外发送第一广播信息,第一广播信息指示了有车辆触发该定位系统。It should be noted that, in addition to the positioning device sending the first broadcast information, in some possible embodiments, when a vehicle triggers a positioning system, the server can directly sense which positioning system in the semi-enclosed space is triggered. The server may send out the first broadcast information, and the first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning system.
本申请的另一种实施例中,在有车辆触发定位系统时,定位系统先向服务器上报自己的编号,服务器再向外发送第一广播信息,第一广播信息指示了有车辆触发该定位系统。In another embodiment of the present application, when a vehicle triggers the positioning system, the positioning system first reports its own number to the server, and the server sends out the first broadcast information. The first broadcast information indicates that a vehicle triggers the positioning system. .
S204、车辆接收第一广播信息,在车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内时,获取地图中该定位系统的位置信息,并根据该位置信息在地图中对车辆进行定位。S204. The vehicle receives the first broadcast information, and when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system, obtains the location information of the positioning system on the map, and locates the vehicle on the map according to the location information.
本申请实施例中,车辆接收的第一广播信息可以辅助车辆判断是否自身触发了该定位系统,在车辆接收到第一广播信息且车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内时,该车辆触发了该定位系统,则可从地图中获取该定位系统的位置信息,并将该定位系统的位置信息作为车辆的位置信息在地图中对车辆进行定位。车辆从地图中获取定位系统的位置信息的具体操作可参考S102中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, the first broadcast information received by the vehicle can assist the vehicle to determine whether the positioning system is triggered by itself. When the vehicle receives the first broadcast information and the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system, the vehicle triggers the positioning system. The positioning system can obtain the position information of the positioning system from the map, and use the position information of the positioning system as the position information of the vehicle to locate the vehicle on the map. For the specific operation of the vehicle to obtain the location information of the positioning system from the map, refer to the relevant description in S102, which will not be repeated here.
在一些可能的实施例中,车辆也可能先接收到来自某定位装置的第一广播信息,再判断车辆当前是否位于该定位装置的预设范围内,当车辆确定当前位于该定位装置的预设范围内时,即将该定位装置的位置信息作为车辆的位置信息进行定位;当车辆不位于该定位装置的预设范围内时,则丢弃本次接收的来自该定位装置的第一广播信息。In some possible embodiments, the vehicle may also first receive the first broadcast information from a positioning device, and then determine whether the vehicle is currently located within the preset range of the positioning device. When the vehicle determines that it is currently located within the preset range of the positioning device When it is within the range, the position information of the positioning device is used as the position information of the vehicle for positioning; when the vehicle is not within the preset range of the positioning device, the first broadcast information received from the positioning device this time is discarded.
在一些可能的实施例中,车辆接收到的第一广播信息中携带有定位装置的位置信息和触发时刻,当车辆当前位于该定位装置的预设范围内时,则车辆可根据第一广播信息中该定位装置的位置信息和触发时刻、结合当前时刻以及车辆的运动信息在地图中对车辆进行定位。In some possible embodiments, the first broadcast information received by the vehicle carries the location information and the trigger time of the positioning device. When the vehicle is currently within the preset range of the positioning device, the vehicle can use the first broadcast information The location information and trigger time of the positioning device are combined with the current time and the vehicle's motion information to locate the vehicle on the map.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,对于接收第一广播信息以及车辆监测自身是否位于定位系统的预设范围内的发生或者执行顺序不做具体限定。关于第一广播信息的描述具体可参考S103,为了说明书的剪简洁,在此不在赘述。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the occurrence or execution sequence of receiving the first broadcast information and whether the vehicle monitors whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system is not specifically limited. For the description of the first broadcast information, please refer to S103. For the sake of brevity of the description, it will not be repeated here.
S205、在对车辆进行定位后,获取车辆的运动信息,根据车辆的位置信息和运动信息在地图中对车辆进行导航。S205. After the vehicle is positioned, the movement information of the vehicle is acquired, and the vehicle is navigated on the map according to the position information and movement information of the vehicle.
本申请实施例中,车辆触发当前的定位系统时,即可将当前定位系统的位置信息作为车辆的位置信息实现车辆在半封闭空间的精确定位。在车辆进行了定位后,车辆还可以获取自身的运动信息,例如,车辆的加速度、速度和行驶方向等,基于获得的精确位置(即当前定位系统的位置信息)以及车辆的运动信息利用自身的惯性导航系统在半封闭空间的地图中对车辆进行导航。In the embodiment of the present application, when the vehicle triggers the current positioning system, the position information of the current positioning system can be used as the position information of the vehicle to realize accurate positioning of the vehicle in a semi-enclosed space. After the vehicle is positioned, the vehicle can also obtain its own motion information, such as the acceleration, speed, and driving direction of the vehicle. Based on the obtained precise position (that is, the position information of the current positioning system) and the vehicle’s motion information, the vehicle can use its own motion information. The inertial navigation system navigates the vehicle on a map in a semi-enclosed space.
需要说明的是,在半封闭空间设置有多个定位系统时,在车辆进行了一次定位后,且在车辆触发下一个定位系统之前,车辆可根据自身的位置信息和运动信息在地图中对车辆进行导航。需要说明的是,所谓车辆触发下一个定位系统是指车辆位于下一个定位系统的预设范围内且车辆接收到指示了下一个定位系统被触发时的第一广播信息。It should be noted that when multiple positioning systems are installed in a semi-enclosed space, after the vehicle has been positioned once, and before the vehicle triggers the next positioning system, the vehicle can compare the vehicle on the map based on its own location information and movement information. Navigate. It should be noted that the so-called vehicle triggering the next positioning system means that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the next positioning system and the vehicle receives the first broadcast information indicating that the next positioning system is triggered.
需要说明的是,关于惯性导航技术进行导航的方法在车辆的实时定位领域已发展的十 分应用且应用广泛,为了说明书的简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that the method of navigation with inertial navigation technology has been developed and widely used in the field of real-time positioning of vehicles. For the sake of brevity of the description, it will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,由于惯性导航系统是基于对惯性测量单元IMU测量的加速度进行二次积分以及车辆的当前位置进行定位的,因此IMU会累积误差,且累积误差会随着时间显著增大,而由于半封闭空间中间隔设置了多个定位系统,且相邻两个定位系统之间的距离相较于整个半封闭空间的长度要小的多,因此,相邻两个定位系统之间的距离导致的IMU的累积误差可忽略不计。It should be noted that since the inertial navigation system is based on the quadratic integration of the acceleration measured by the inertial measurement unit IMU and the positioning of the current position of the vehicle, the IMU will accumulate errors, and the accumulated errors will increase significantly over time. Since multiple positioning systems are arranged at intervals in the semi-enclosed space, and the distance between two adjacent positioning systems is much smaller than the length of the entire semi-enclosed space, the distance between two adjacent positioning systems The resulting cumulative error of the IMU is negligible.
可以看到,实施本申请实施例,在卫星信号不佳的半封闭空间中,通过在半封闭空间中设置至少一组定位系统辅助车辆实现在半封闭空间中的精确定位,当车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内且收到来自定位系统的触发信息时,车辆可根据对应的定位系统的位置信息实现精确定位,有效解决了在卫星信号被遮挡或者屏蔽的隧道、地下等场景下车辆无法定位或定位不准的问题,提升了信号不佳的半封闭空间下车辆定位的鲁棒性以及节省了车辆定位的施工成本。It can be seen that in the implementation of the embodiments of this application, in a semi-enclosed space with poor satellite signals, at least one set of positioning systems are provided in the semi-enclosed space to assist the vehicle in achieving precise positioning in the semi-enclosed space. When the vehicle is located in the positioning system When the vehicle is within the preset range and receives trigger information from the positioning system, the vehicle can achieve precise positioning according to the location information of the corresponding positioning system, which effectively solves the problem that the vehicle cannot be positioned in the tunnel or underground where the satellite signal is blocked or shielded. Or the problem of inaccurate positioning improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in a semi-enclosed space with poor signal and saves the construction cost of vehicle positioning.
参见图6,基于上文图1实施所描述的系统架构,下面描述本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位方法,其中,半封闭空间不妨以隧道为例、颜色装置不妨以标识灯组为例、定位装置不妨以定位光栅为例进行方案的示例性阐述,但本申请实施例不限定半封闭空间仅为隧道、颜色指示装置仅为标识灯组或者定位装置仅为定位光栅。需要说明的是,图6实施例中,隧道中设置了K组定位系统,每组定位系统包含一个定位光栅和一个标识灯组,即有K个定位光栅和K个标识灯组,K为大于1的整数。另外,图6实施例可以独立于图4和图5实施例,也可以是对图4和图5实施例的补充。该方法包括但不限于以下步骤:Referring to Figure 6, based on the system architecture described in the implementation of Figure 1 above, the following describes a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application, in which a tunnel may be used as an example in a semi-enclosed space, and an identification light group may be used as an example in the color device. The positioning device may take a positioning grating as an example to illustrate the solution, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-enclosed space to be only a tunnel, the color indicating device is only an identification light group, or the positioning device is only a positioning grating. It should be noted that, in the embodiment of FIG. 6, K groups of positioning systems are set in the tunnel, and each group of positioning systems includes a positioning grating and a marking light group, that is, there are K positioning gratings and K marking light groups, and K is greater than An integer of 1. In addition, the embodiment in FIG. 6 may be independent of the embodiment in FIGS. 4 and 5, or may be a supplement to the embodiment in FIGS. 4 and 5. The method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S301、车辆进入目标隧道前,车辆向第三装置发送第一请求。S301: Before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle sends a first request to the third device.
本申请实施中,车辆在进入目标隧道前,车辆向第三装置发送第一请求以获取目标隧道的地图。第三装置可以是服务器,目标隧道入口处的路侧单元,还可以是已进入目标隧道的其他车辆等,本申请实施例不做具体限定。In the implementation of this application, before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle sends a first request to the third device to obtain a map of the target tunnel. The third device may be a server, a roadside unit at the entrance of the target tunnel, or other vehicles that have entered the target tunnel, etc., which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
一具体实施中,第三装置不妨以服务器为例进行示例性地阐述。车辆在即将进入目标隧道前,向服务器发送第一请求,第一请求中携带有车辆当前的位置信息,以使服务器根据第一请求中携带的位置信息确定距离该车辆最近的隧道为本申请实施例中的目标隧道。In a specific implementation, the third device may take a server as an example to illustrate. Before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, it sends a first request to the server. The first request carries the current location information of the vehicle, so that the server can determine the tunnel closest to the vehicle according to the location information carried in the first request. This application is implemented The target tunnel in the example.
需要说明的是,除了服务器外,车辆还可以从目标隧道入口处的路侧单元或者已进入目标隧道中的其他车辆那里获取目标隧道的地图,本申请实施例不做具体限定。It should be noted that in addition to the server, the vehicle may also obtain the map of the target tunnel from the roadside unit at the entrance of the target tunnel or other vehicles that have entered the target tunnel, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
S302、服务器向车辆发送目标隧道的地图。S302: The server sends a map of the target tunnel to the vehicle.
本申请实施例中,服务器接收到来自车辆的第一请求后,根据第一请求中携带的车辆的位置确定距离该车辆最近的隧道为目标隧道,然后向车辆发送目标隧道的地图,地图中包含K组定位系统的编号以及位置信息。需要说明的是,同组定位系统中的颜色装置和定位装置共用同一个编号和同一个位置信息。In the embodiment of the present application, after the server receives the first request from the vehicle, it determines the tunnel closest to the vehicle as the target tunnel according to the position of the vehicle carried in the first request, and then sends a map of the target tunnel to the vehicle. The map contains The number and position information of the K group positioning system. It should be noted that the color device and the positioning device in the same group of positioning systems share the same number and the same location information.
在一些可能的实施例中,车辆在进入目标隧道前,服务器通过目标隧道入口处的摄像机检测到有车辆,服务器可直接向即将进入目标隧道的车辆发送目标隧道的地图。In some possible embodiments, before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the server detects that there is a vehicle through a camera at the entrance of the target tunnel, and the server may directly send a map of the target tunnel to the vehicle about to enter the target tunnel.
需要说明的是,定位光栅用于检测是否有车辆经过,K个定位光栅是被间隔设置于目标隧道中的,这是因为在隧道较长时,将K个定位光栅间隔设置可以将狭长的隧道分成几 段,在每一段中车辆通过对应的定位光栅时可以获取到一个精确位置,从而有助于实现车辆在隧道中的精确定位。It should be noted that the positioning grating is used to detect whether there is a vehicle passing by, and the K positioning gratings are arranged in the target tunnel at intervals. This is because when the tunnel is long, setting the K positioning gratings at intervals can reduce the length of the tunnel. Divided into several sections, a precise position can be obtained when the vehicle passes through the corresponding positioning grating in each section, which helps to realize the precise positioning of the vehicle in the tunnel.
S303、在车辆进入目标隧道后,车辆采集第一环境图像。S303. After the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle collects a first environment image.
本申请实施例中,车辆接收获得的目标隧道的地图。在车辆进入目标隧道后,可以利用车载的摄像机采集车辆行驶时前方的第一环境图像,第一环境图像中包含第Ki个标识灯组的图像。需要说明的是,摄像机包括摄像头,也可以包括深度传感器、RGB图像传感器或结构光图像传感器中的一个或多个。示例性地,第一环境图像为RGB图像。In the embodiment of the present application, the vehicle receives the obtained map of the target tunnel. After the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle-mounted camera can be used to collect the first environment image in front of the vehicle when it is driving, and the first environment image contains the image of the Ki-th identification light group. It should be noted that the camera includes a camera, and may also include one or more of a depth sensor, an RGB image sensor, or a structured light image sensor. Exemplarily, the first environment image is an RGB image.
需要说明的是,标识灯组通常安装于目标隧道的天花板上,以使行驶于目标隧道中的车辆的摄像机易于采集到该标识灯组的图像。标识灯组包含至少一个标识灯,每个标识灯的发光颜色是预先根据颜色编码设置好的,该颜色编码指示了标识灯组的颜色和顺序。由于隧道一般较为狭长,为了实现车辆在隧道中的定位,隧道中常设置多个标识灯组,且标识灯组的数量与隧道中定位光栅的数量相同,每个定位光栅的附近设置有一个标识灯组,定位光栅与标识灯组一一对应。不同位置处的标识灯组常被配置显示不同的颜色或者不同的颜色排列组合。It should be noted that the identification light group is usually installed on the ceiling of the target tunnel, so that the camera of the vehicle driving in the target tunnel can easily collect the image of the identification light group. The identification light group includes at least one identification light, and the luminous color of each identification light is preset according to a color code, and the color code indicates the color and sequence of the identification light group. Because tunnels are generally relatively long and narrow, in order to realize the positioning of vehicles in the tunnel, multiple identification light groups are often set in the tunnel, and the number of identification light groups is the same as the number of positioning gratings in the tunnel, and a marking light is set near each positioning grating Group, the positioning grating corresponds to the identification light group one by one. The identification light groups at different positions are often configured to display different colors or different color combinations.
参见图7A,图7A示例性地提供了一组标识灯组的示意图,该组标识灯组包含4个标识灯,4个标识灯都固定在同一根横杆上。4个标识灯从左至右排成一行,位于同一水平线上。由图7A可以看出,每个标识灯的颜色都不相同。在一些可能的实施例中,图7B示例性地提供了又一组标识灯组的示意图,参见图7B,该组标识灯组包含4个标识灯,4个标识灯排列成两行两列,每行各有2个标识灯,4个标识灯的颜色均不相同。由此,标识灯组中的标识灯可以从左至右依次排列,也可以多行排列,另外,对于标识灯组中标识灯的数量,本申请也不做具体限定。Referring to FIG. 7A, FIG. 7A exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of a group of identification lights. The group of identification lights includes 4 identification lights, and the 4 identification lights are all fixed on the same crossbar. The 4 identification lights are arranged in a row from left to right and are located on the same horizontal line. It can be seen from Fig. 7A that the color of each indicator light is different. In some possible embodiments, FIG. 7B exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of another group of identification light groups. Referring to FIG. 7B, the group of identification lights includes 4 identification lights, and the 4 identification lights are arranged in two rows and two columns. There are 2 marking lights in each row, and the colors of the 4 marking lights are different. Therefore, the identification lights in the identification light group can be arranged in order from left to right, or arranged in multiple rows. In addition, the number of identification lights in the identification light group is not specifically limited in this application.
参见图8A,图8A示例性地提供了一种标识灯组在隧道中的部署示意图,可以看到,图8A中每个车道上方都设置有一组标识灯组,每组标识灯组都包含4个标识灯,当然,两组标识灯组显示不同的颜色排列组合(图未示)。每组标识灯组的标识灯沿垂直于车道的方向依次排列,即标识灯组的横杆与地面上的车道线垂直,该方向与车辆的速度方向垂直,如此设置可以有效降低光流现象的干扰,从而减小了对标识灯组的颜色识别的干扰。在一些可能的实施例中,标识灯组的标识灯还可以多行排列,其在隧道中的部署部署方式可参见图8B。Referring to Fig. 8A, Fig. 8A exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of the deployment of a sign light group in a tunnel. It can be seen that a group of sign light groups is set above each lane in Fig. 8A, and each group of sign light groups contains 4 Of course, the two sets of identification lights display different color permutations and combinations (not shown in the figure). The identification lights of each identification light group are arranged in the direction perpendicular to the lane, that is, the crossbar of the identification light group is perpendicular to the lane line on the ground, and the direction is perpendicular to the speed of the vehicle. This setting can effectively reduce the optical flow phenomenon. Interference, thereby reducing the interference to the color recognition of the identification light group. In some possible embodiments, the identification lights of the identification light group can also be arranged in multiple rows, and the deployment mode of the identification lights in the tunnel can be seen in FIG. 8B.
参见图9,图9示例性地提供了一种车辆在隧道中的定位示意图,图9中只是示例性地示出了一组对应的标识灯组和定位光栅。在沿车辆法定行驶的方向上,第Ki个标识灯组与第Ki个定位光栅处于同一位置不同高度,且图9是从侧视图角度展示了车辆的定位示意图,可以看到,第Ki个标识灯组和第Ki个定位光栅位于垂直于地面的同一直线上。标识灯组安装于隧道的天花板,定位光栅安装于隧道的侧壁,车辆上安装有车载摄像机,用于拍摄行驶前方的第Ki个标识灯组。在一些可能的实施例中,定位光栅也可以安装于其对应的标识灯组的前方或者后方。图9中,可以看到,定位光栅向对侧的墙壁发射激光或红外线。在一些可能的实施例中,定位光栅还可以安装于隧道的天花板上,定位光栅向下墙壁发射激光或红外线。Referring to FIG. 9, FIG. 9 exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel, and FIG. 9 only exemplarily shows a set of corresponding identification light groups and positioning gratings. In the legal direction of the vehicle, the Ki-th identification light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are at the same position and different heights, and Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing the positioning of the vehicle from a side view. It can be seen that the Ki-th identification The light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are located on the same straight line perpendicular to the ground. The identification light group is installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, the positioning grating is installed on the side wall of the tunnel, and a vehicle-mounted camera is installed on the vehicle to photograph the Ki-th identification light group ahead of driving. In some possible embodiments, the positioning grating may also be installed in front of or behind the corresponding identification light group. In Figure 9, it can be seen that the positioning grating emits laser or infrared rays to the opposite wall. In some possible embodiments, the positioning grating can also be installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, and the positioning grating emits laser or infrared rays down the wall.
S304、车辆根据第一环境图像识别第Ki个标识灯组,并确定车辆与第Ki个定位光栅 之间的第一距离。S304. The vehicle recognizes the Ki-th identification light group according to the first environment image, and determines the first distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th positioning grating.
本申请实施例中,车辆在获得包含第Ki个标识灯组的第一环境图像后,一方面,车辆需通过图像处理算法识别和解析第一环境图像中第Ki个标识灯组的颜色,计算车辆距离第Ki个标识灯组的第二距离(如图9);另一方面,车辆从地图中获取第Ki个标识灯组的离地高度,根据第Ki个标识灯组的离地高度和车辆距离第Ki个标识灯组的第二距离,获得车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第一距离(如图9)。In the embodiment of this application, after the vehicle obtains the first environmental image containing the Ki-th identification light group, on the one hand, the vehicle needs to recognize and analyze the color of the Ki-th identification light group in the first environment image through an image processing algorithm, and calculate The second distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th indicator light group (as shown in Figure 9); on the other hand, the vehicle obtains the ground height of the Ki-th indicator light group from the map, according to the ground height of the Ki-th indicator light group and The second distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th identification light group, and the first distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th positioning grating is obtained (as shown in Fig. 9).
需要说明的是,第二距离是指摄像机所在的车辆距离第Ki个标识灯组的空间距离,第一距离是指摄像机所在的车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的距离,具体地,第一距离为摄像机所在的车辆距离垂直平面的距离,该垂直平面为第Ki个定位光栅所在的与车辆行驶方向垂直的平面。It should be noted that the second distance refers to the spatial distance between the vehicle where the camera is located and the Ki-th identification light group, and the first distance refers to the distance between the vehicle where the camera is located and the Ki-th positioning grating. Specifically, the first distance is The distance between the vehicle where the camera is located and the vertical plane, which is the plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle where the Ki-th positioning grating is located.
一具体实施中,车辆可通过如下方式获得车辆距离第Ki个标识灯组的距离:车辆对第Ki个标识灯组的颜色进行解析获得解析结果,该解析结果指示了第Ki个标识灯组的颜色和顺序,由于不同位置处的标识灯组的颜色是不同,因此,车辆可将该解析结果和地图中的多个标识灯组的颜色编码进行匹配,从而识别出第Ki个标识灯组;车辆在识别到第Ki个标识灯组后,即可获得第Ki个标识灯组在第一环境图像中的像素位置以及第Ki个标识灯组在第一环境图像中的尺寸大小,再结合地图中第Ki个标识灯组的实际尺寸信息,可以确定车辆距离第Ki个标识灯组的距离。另外,由于第Ki个标识灯组已确定,可以从地图中获取第Ki个标识灯组的离地高度,最后,根据第Ki个标识灯组的离地高度和车辆距离第Ki个标识灯组的距离,且车辆上的摄像机的离地高度已知,根据勾股定理即可获得车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第一距离。In a specific implementation, the vehicle can obtain the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th indicator light group in the following way: the vehicle analyzes the color of the Ki-th indicator light group to obtain the analysis result, which indicates the Ki-th indicator light group Color and sequence. Since the colors of the identification light groups at different positions are different, the vehicle can match the analysis result with the color codes of multiple identification light groups in the map to identify the Ki-th identification light group; After the vehicle recognizes the Ki-th marking light group, it can obtain the pixel position of the Ki-th marking light group in the first environment image and the size of the Ki-th marking light group in the first environment image, combined with the map The actual size information of the Ki-th identification light group in the middle can determine the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th identification light group. In addition, since the Ki-th marking light group has been determined, the ground height of the Ki-th marking light group can be obtained from the map. Finally, the Ki-th marking light group is based on the ground height of the Ki-th marking light group and the distance from the vehicle. And the ground height of the camera on the vehicle is known. According to the Pythagorean theorem, the first distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th positioning grating can be obtained.
在一些可能的实施例中,车辆在获得自身距离第Ki个标识灯组的第二距离后,还可以结合车辆上的摄像机拍摄第Ki个标识灯组时的俯仰角,获得车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第一距离。In some possible embodiments, after the vehicle obtains the second distance from the Ki-th indicator light group, it can also combine the pitch angle of the Ki-th indicator light group with the camera on the vehicle to obtain the Ki-th indicator light group from the vehicle. Position the first distance of the grating.
需要说明的是,在一些可能的实施例中,第Ki组定位系统中的第Ki个定位光栅和第Ki个标识灯组位于相近位置的不同高度,两者可以一前一后安装。示例性地,如图10A所示,从车辆的前进方向来看,第Ki个标识灯组和第Ki个定位光栅分别一前一后安装于半封闭空间中,第一距离如图10A所示;如图10B所示,从车辆的前进方向来看,第Ki个标识灯组和第Ki个定位光栅分别一后一前安装于半封闭空间中,第一距离如图10B所示。在同组定位系统中的定位光栅和标识灯组位于相近位置的不同高度时,车辆在获得车辆距离第Ki个标识灯组的第二距离后,还需要根据车载摄像机与第Ki个标识灯组之间的垂直高度差(即可由车载摄像机的离地高度和第Ki个标识灯组高度获得)、第Ki个标识灯组和第Ki个定位光栅在车辆行驶方向上的距离差计算第一距离。It should be noted that, in some possible embodiments, the Ki-th positioning grating and the Ki-th identification light group in the Ki-th positioning system are located at different heights at similar positions, and the two can be installed one after the other. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 10A, from the perspective of the forward direction of the vehicle, the Ki-th identification light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are installed in a semi-enclosed space one after the other, and the first distance is shown in FIG. 10A As shown in Figure 10B, from the perspective of the forward direction of the vehicle, the Ki-th identification light group and the Ki-th positioning grating are installed in a semi-enclosed space one after the other, and the first distance is shown in Figure 10B. When the positioning grating and the marking light group in the same group of positioning system are located at different heights at similar positions, after the vehicle obtains the second distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th marking light group, it also needs to be based on the vehicle camera and the Ki-th marking light group. The vertical height difference between (that can be obtained from the ground height of the on-board camera and the height of the Ki-th marking light group), the distance difference between the Ki-th marking light group and the Ki-th positioning grating in the direction of the vehicle, calculate the first distance .
示例性地,对于标识灯组的识别还可以通过先确定其位置再进行颜色解析来实现。由于标识灯组通常设置在车道的上方,因此标识灯组在第一环境图像中的成像位置有一个确定的区域,倘若利用传统的图像处理算法,可通过裁剪获得标识灯组所在的感兴趣区域(或称目标区域),若标识灯组中的标识灯组从左至右依次排列,则标识灯组的轮廓为矩形,通过轮廓提取算法(例如,canny算子、sift算子等)识别感兴趣区域中各连通域的轮廓,在轮廓的长宽比满足预设条件时,即可识别出对应的标识灯组,从而可以确定标识灯组的长 方形轮廓四个顶点在第一环境图像中的像素位置,并将四个顶点的像素位置求平均以作为第Ki个标识灯组的像素位置。在一些可能的实施例中,还可以利用机器视觉领域中的各中目标检测算法(例如,yolo、faster-rcnn等)对第一环境图像中的第Ki个标识灯组进行检测。应理解,目标检测算法在计算机视觉领域已经非常成熟并被广泛使用,本申请在此不再赘述。Exemplarily, the identification of the identification light group can also be achieved by first determining its position and then performing color analysis. Since the marking light group is usually set above the lane, the imaging position of the marking light group in the first environment image has a certain area. If traditional image processing algorithms are used, the area of interest where the marking light group is located can be obtained by cropping (Or called the target area), if the identification light groups in the identification light group are arranged in order from left to right, the outline of the identification light group is a rectangle, and the recognition sense is recognized by the contour extraction algorithm (for example, canny operator, sift operator, etc.) The contour of each connected domain in the region of interest, when the aspect ratio of the contour meets the preset condition, the corresponding identification light group can be identified, so that the four vertices of the rectangular outline of the identification light group can be determined in the first environment image. The pixel position, and the pixel positions of the four vertices are averaged to be the pixel position of the Ki-th identification lamp group. In some possible embodiments, various target detection algorithms in the field of machine vision (for example, yolo, faster-rcnn, etc.) can also be used to detect the Ki-th identification light group in the first environment image. It should be understood that the target detection algorithm has been very mature and widely used in the field of computer vision, and will not be repeated in this application.
为了清楚地说明标识灯组的颜色的解析,先解释下关于标识灯组的颜色编码。可以理解,为了降低识别标识灯组的误码率,通常尽可能地使不同位置处的标识灯组呈现不同的颜色或者颜色排列组合,且相邻的两个或多个标识灯组的颜色差异明显。RGB色彩空间是工业界的一种颜色标准,其通过对红(Red)、绿(Green)和蓝(Blue)三个颜色通道之间不同程度的叠加得到各种颜色。RGB分别代表红、绿、蓝三个通道的颜色,每个通道的取值范围均为[0,255],“0”表示没有刺激量,“255”表示刺激量达到最大值,例如:当R、G、B三者均为0时,三通道合成表示黑色;当R、G、B三者均为255时,三通道合成白光。因此,以标识灯组中的一个标识灯为例,单个标识灯的颜色编码可以表示成(r,g,b),r,g,b分别表示红、绿、蓝三个通道的刺激量数值。由于RGB色彩空间具有三个通道,假设每个通道只取0或255,则单个标识灯就有8种灯光颜色选择。而实际应用中,每个通道可以取0-255中的任意值,标识灯的发光颜色可选的范围更广。In order to clearly explain the analysis of the color of the identification lamp group, first explain the color coding of the identification lamp group. It can be understood that in order to reduce the bit error rate of identifying the identification lamp groups, the identification lamp groups at different positions are usually shown in different colors or color combinations as much as possible, and the color difference of two or more adjacent identification lamp groups is different. obvious. The RGB color space is a color standard in the industry, and various colors are obtained by superimposing the three color channels of red (Red), green (Green) and blue (Blue) to different degrees. RGB represents the colors of the red, green, and blue channels, and the value range of each channel is [0,255], "0" means no stimulus, and "255" means the stimulus reaches the maximum value, for example: when R, When G and B are all 0, three-channel synthesis means black; when R, G, and B are all 255, three-channel synthesis is white light. Therefore, taking an indicator light in the indicator light group as an example, the color code of a single indicator light can be expressed as (r, g, b), and r, g, b represent the stimulus value of the three channels of red, green, and blue respectively. . Since the RGB color space has three channels, assuming that each channel only takes 0 or 255, there are 8 light color choices for a single sign lamp. In practical applications, each channel can take any value from 0 to 255, and the light-emitting color of the indicator light can be selected in a wider range.
综上,第一环境图像为RGB图像时,所谓车辆对标识灯组的颜色的解析是指获取标识灯组中每个标识灯的三个通道的数值(r,g,b),(r,g,b)也叫做标识灯的颜色编码。车辆获得的解析结果中指示了第Ki个标识灯组中标识灯的数量、颜色的排列顺序以及每个标识灯的颜色。在一些可能的实施例中,也可以采用HSV色彩模式,其中,H表示色度(Hue)、S表示饱和度(Saturation)、V表示明度(Value);还可以采用HSL色彩模式,其中,H表示色度(Hue)、S表示饱和度(Saturation)、L表示亮度(Lightness)。在使用HSV色彩模式、HSL色彩模式时,只需将第一环境图像从RGB空间转换到HSV空间或者HSL空间,再依次获取各通道的数值即可。To sum up, when the first environment image is an RGB image, the so-called analysis of the color of the identification lamp group by the vehicle refers to obtaining the values (r, g, b) of the three channels of each identification lamp in the identification lamp group, (r, g, b) is also called the color coding of the identification light. The analysis result obtained by the vehicle indicates the number of identification lights in the Ki-th identification light group, the order of the colors, and the color of each identification light. In some possible embodiments, HSV color mode can also be used, where H represents chroma (Hue), S represents saturation (Saturation), and V represents lightness (Value); HSL color mode can also be used, where H Represents chroma (Hue), S represents saturation (Saturation), and L represents brightness (Lightness). When using HSV color mode and HSL color mode, you only need to convert the first environment image from RGB space to HSV space or HSL space, and then obtain the value of each channel in turn.
需要说明的是,考虑到红色、绿色或者黄色与已有的信号灯的颜色相同,因此为了提高对标识灯组及其色彩的识别率,尤其是在标识灯组中只有一个标识灯的情况下,标识灯的发光颜色常设置成除红色、绿色和黄色等信号灯的颜色之外的颜色。It should be noted that considering that the red, green or yellow color is the same as the existing signal lights, in order to improve the recognition rate of the identification light group and its color, especially when there is only one identification light in the identification light group, The luminous color of the sign lamp is often set to a color other than the color of the signal lamp such as red, green, and yellow.
在一些可能的实施例中,由于目标隧道比较狭长,在一段笔直的目标隧道中,车辆采集的第一环境图像中可能存在两个或多个标识灯组,由于标识灯组距离本车辆的远近明显不同,因此第一环境图像中显示的不同位置处的标识灯组的大小也是不同的,可以通过图像处理算法分割出离车辆最近的那个标识灯组,进一步地,再对分割出的标识灯组的颜色进行色彩解析。In some possible embodiments, since the target tunnel is relatively long and narrow, in a straight target tunnel, there may be two or more identification light groups in the first environment image collected by the vehicle. Significantly different, so the size of the identification light group at different positions displayed in the first environment image is also different. The image processing algorithm can be used to segment the identification light group closest to the vehicle, and further, the segmented identification light Color analysis of group colors.
需要说明的是,优选地,尽可能使隧道中的K个标识灯组的颜色或颜色排列组合均不相同。但在一些可能的实施例中,也可能存在某隧道中的K个标识灯组中有多个标识灯组具有相同的颜色或颜色排列组合,在此情况下,具有相同的颜色或颜色排列组合的各标识灯组之间的间隔距离较大。不妨以K(K大于2)个标识灯组中有2个标识灯组的颜色排列组合相同为例,这2个标识灯组具有相同的颜色排列顺序,这两个标识灯组被设置于隧道的两端,当车辆获得其中某个标识灯组的解析结果后将其与地图中各标识灯组进行匹配, 发现该解析结果对应的有2个标识灯组,在此情况下,车辆可以根据自身的运动信息(例如:加速度、速度等)和自身进入隧道前的初始位置结合惯性导航系统确定车辆当前距离隧道入口的距离,结合地图中包含的各标识灯组距离隧道入口的距离从而可以确定自身识别出的标识灯组,并在地图中对该标识灯组进行标记,若车辆在当前隧道中再次获得相同的解析结果,则可以确定对应的标识灯组即为这两个标识灯组中未被标记的一个。It should be noted that, preferably, the colors or color permutations and combinations of the K identification lamp groups in the tunnel are as different as possible. However, in some possible embodiments, there may also be multiple identification light groups in the K identification light groups in a tunnel that have the same color or color permutation and combination. In this case, they have the same color or color permutation and combination. The distance between the identification light groups is relatively large. Let’s take the example of K (K greater than 2) indicator light groups where two indicator light groups have the same color arrangement and combination. These two indicator light groups have the same color arrangement sequence, and these two indicator light groups are set in the tunnel. When the vehicle obtains the analysis result of one of the identification light groups, it matches it with the identification light groups in the map. It is found that the analysis result corresponds to 2 identification light groups. In this case, the vehicle can be based on Your own motion information (such as acceleration, speed, etc.) and your initial position before entering the tunnel combined with the inertial navigation system to determine the current distance of the vehicle from the entrance of the tunnel, combined with the distance of each indicator light group contained in the map from the entrance of the tunnel, it can be determined Identify the identification light group by itself, and mark the identification light group in the map. If the vehicle obtains the same analysis result again in the current tunnel, it can be determined that the corresponding identification light group is the two identification light groups The unmarked one.
S305、根据第一距离判断车辆是否在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。S305: Determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the first distance.
本申请实施例中,比较第一距离和预设阈值的大小,第一距离为车辆与第Ki个定位光栅之间的距离,当第一距离小于等于预设阈值时,车辆位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内;当第一距离大于预设阈值时,车辆不位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。需要说明的是,预设阈值可以是1米、1.5米、2.5米、3米或其他值,本申请不做具体限定。In the embodiment of this application, the first distance is compared with the preset threshold. The first distance is the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th positioning grating. When the first distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, the vehicle is located at the Ki-th positioning grating. Within the preset range of the grating; when the first distance is greater than the preset threshold, the vehicle is not within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating. It should be noted that the preset threshold value may be 1 meter, 1.5 meters, 2.5 meters, 3 meters or other values, which are not specifically limited in this application.
需要说明的是,对于每个定位光栅来说,预设阈值可以是固定的,在一些可能的实施例中,由于半封闭空间存在弯道等情况下,个别定位光栅对应的预设阈值是不同的,在此情况下,车辆在识别出第Ki个标识灯组后,可以确定其对应的定位光栅的预设阈值,再判断第一距离与该预设阈值的大小,确定车辆是否在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。It should be noted that for each positioning grating, the preset threshold may be fixed. In some possible embodiments, due to the presence of a curve in a semi-enclosed space, the preset thresholds corresponding to individual positioning gratings are different. In this case, after the vehicle recognizes the Ki-th identification light group, it can determine the corresponding preset threshold of the positioning grating, and then determine the size of the first distance and the preset threshold to determine whether the vehicle is in the Ki-th Within the preset range of a positioning grating.
S306、在有车辆触发第Ki个定位光栅时,第Ki个定位光栅向外发送第一广播信息。本步骤具体可参考图5实施例中S203的相关描述,这里不再赘述。需要说明的是,第Ki个定位光栅即为S203中的定位系统。S306: When a vehicle triggers the Ki-th positioning grating, the Ki-th positioning grating sends out the first broadcast information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S203 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here. It should be noted that the Ki-th positioning grating is the positioning system in S203.
S307、车辆接收第一广播信息,在车辆位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内时,获取地图中第Ki个定位光栅的位置信息,并根据该位置信息在地图中对车辆进行定位。本步骤具体可参考图5实施例中S204的相关描述,这里不再赘述。S307. The vehicle receives the first broadcast information, and when the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, obtains the position information of the Ki-th positioning grating in the map, and locates the vehicle on the map according to the position information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S204 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
S308、在车辆触发下一个定位光栅前,获取车辆的运动信息,根据车辆的位置信息和运动信息在地图中对车辆进行导航。本步骤具体可参考图5实施例中S205的相关描述,这里不再赘述。S308: Before the vehicle triggers the next positioning grating, the vehicle's motion information is acquired, and the vehicle is navigated on the map according to the vehicle's position information and motion information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S205 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
可以看到,实施本申请实施例,在卫星信号不佳的隧道中,通过在隧道中设置定位光栅和标识灯组辅助车辆实现在隧道中的精确定位,车辆基于标识灯组的颜色和顺序识别隧道中不同位置处的标识灯组,从而确定车辆与该标识灯组对应的定位光栅的位置关系,结合来自该定位光栅的触发信息即可实现车辆在隧道中的精确定位,有效解决了在卫星信号被遮挡或者屏蔽的隧道、地下等场景下车辆无法定位或定位不准的问题,提升了信号不佳的半封闭空间中车辆定位的鲁棒性以及节省了车辆定位的施工成本。It can be seen that in the implementation of the embodiment of this application, in tunnels with poor satellite signals, positioning gratings and identification light groups are set in the tunnel to assist vehicles in realizing precise positioning in the tunnel. Vehicles are identified based on the color and sequence of the identification light groups. The identification light groups at different positions in the tunnel determine the position relationship between the vehicle and the positioning grating corresponding to the identification light group. Combining the trigger information from the positioning grating can realize the precise positioning of the vehicle in the tunnel, which effectively solves the problem of satellite positioning. The problem of inaccurate or inaccurate positioning of vehicles in tunnels and underground scenes where the signal is blocked or shielded improves the robustness of vehicle positioning in semi-enclosed spaces with poor signals and saves the construction cost of vehicle positioning.
下面以一个具体的应用场景来进一步说明图6实施例所描述的方法。The following uses a specific application scenario to further illustrate the method described in the embodiment in FIG. 6.
参见图11,车辆A和车辆B行驶于某隧道中,车辆A和车辆B上均配置有一个摄像机,车辆A和车辆B均已通过第1个定位光栅,且在接近第2个定位光栅的过程中,车辆A通过自身的摄像机A采集隧道中的第2个标识灯组的图像,并对采集到的图像进行处理确定自身距离第2个定位光栅的第一距离是否小于等于预设阈值,在第一距离小于等于预设阈值时则说明本车辆触发第2个定位光栅。车辆B也执行与车辆A相同的动作。因此,在图11中,对于车辆A来说,车辆A距离第2个定位光栅的距离刚好为预设阈值,故车辆A监测到自身触发第2个定位光栅时,则在地图中获取第2个定位光栅在WGS84坐标 下下的位置坐标(B2,L2,H2)并更新成自己当前的位置坐标,显示在车辆的显示屏上。对于车辆B来说,车辆B距离第2个定位光栅的距离大于预设阈值,故车辆B未监测到自身触发第2个定位光栅,因此车辆B的显示屏上显示的位置坐标为(B,L,H),并未更新成第2个定位光栅的位置坐标。Referring to Figure 11, vehicle A and vehicle B are driving in a tunnel. Both vehicles A and B are equipped with a camera. Both vehicle A and vehicle B have passed the first positioning grating and are close to the second positioning grating. In the process, vehicle A uses its own camera A to capture the image of the second identification light group in the tunnel, and processes the captured images to determine whether the first distance between itself and the second positioning grating is less than or equal to the preset threshold. When the first distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, it indicates that the vehicle triggers the second positioning grating. Vehicle B also performs the same actions as vehicle A. Therefore, in Figure 11, for vehicle A, the distance between vehicle A and the second positioning grating is just the preset threshold. Therefore, when vehicle A detects that it triggers the second positioning grating, the second positioning grating is obtained from the map. The position coordinates (B2, L2, H2) of the positioning gratings under the WGS84 coordinates are updated to their current position coordinates and displayed on the vehicle's display screen. For vehicle B, the distance between vehicle B and the second positioning grating is greater than the preset threshold, so vehicle B does not detect that it triggers the second positioning grating, so the position coordinates displayed on the display of vehicle B are (B, L, H), has not been updated to the position coordinates of the second positioning grating.
需要说明的是,设置于半封闭空间(例如,隧道)中的标识灯若来自不同厂家,即使控制不同的标识灯发出同样颜色的光,也可能导致车辆上的摄像机解析出不同标识灯的三通道数值不一致,另外,考虑到半封闭空间中的照明灯可能对识别标识灯的颜色产生干扰,因此,在半封闭空间安装标识灯后,安排工程车采集所述有标识灯发出不同颜色灯光下的图像,并对其进行颜色解码,将解析结果存储于服务器中作为参照基准,其也是半封闭空间的地图中标识灯组的颜色编码的来源。举例来说,若控制某一标识灯发出红光,工程车采集图像对其进行解码会发现颜色编码(r,g,b三通道的数值)并不是标准的(255,0,0),而是(247,9,13),因此,若标识灯发出红光,则地图中存储的该标识灯对应的颜色编码为(247,9,13),从而有效避免了不同厂家产品带来的差异性。然而,随着标识灯使用时间增长,会发生器件老化,会使解码获得的标识灯的颜色编码超出误差范围,导致与地图中的颜色编码匹配失败,则车辆定位失败。It should be noted that if the marking lights installed in a semi-enclosed space (for example, a tunnel) come from different manufacturers, even if different marking lights are controlled to emit the same color light, it may cause the camera on the vehicle to resolve three different marking lights. The channel values are inconsistent. In addition, considering that the lights in the semi-enclosed space may interfere with the color of the identification light The image is decoded in color, and the analysis result is stored in the server as a reference. It is also the source of the color code for identifying the lamp group in the semi-enclosed space map. For example, if you control a sign light to emit red light, and decode the image collected by a construction vehicle, you will find that the color code (the values of the three channels r, g, and b) is not standard (255, 0, 0), and Yes (247,9,13), therefore, if the indicator light emits red light, the corresponding color code of the indicator light stored in the map is (247,9,13), which effectively avoids the differences caused by products of different manufacturers sex. However, as the use time of the marker lamp increases, device aging will occur, which will cause the color code of the marker lamp obtained by decoding to exceed the error range, resulting in failure to match the color code in the map, and the vehicle positioning will fail.
参见图12,图12是本申请实施例提供的一种标识灯故障检测方法的流程图,该方法包括但不限于以下步骤:Referring to FIG. 12, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a method for detecting a failure of an indicator lamp provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method includes, but is not limited to, the following steps:
S401、车辆向服务器上报标识灯组的颜色的解析结果。S401: The vehicle reports the analysis result of the color of the identification lamp group to the server.
具体地,车辆的图像采集装置识别出半封闭空间中的某个标识灯组后,解码标识灯组的颜色获得解析结果,根据自己实时位置在地图中确定距离自身最近的定位装置的位置信息,由于标识灯组与定位装置一一对应,从而确定该标识灯组对应的编号。然后,车辆可向服务器发送该标识灯组的解析结果以及其对应的编号。Specifically, after the vehicle's image acquisition device recognizes a certain identification light group in the semi-enclosed space, it decodes the color of the identification light group to obtain the analysis result, and determines the location information of the nearest positioning device on the map according to its real-time location. Since the identification light group corresponds to the positioning device one-to-one, the number corresponding to the identification light group is determined. Then, the vehicle can send the analysis result of the identification light group and its corresponding number to the server.
S402、服务器比对解析结果与数据库中的数据,判断解析结果是否在范围内。S402: The server compares the analysis result with the data in the database, and judges whether the analysis result is within the range.
具体地,服务器接收到车辆上报的解析结果以及解析结果对应的标识灯组的编号后,在数据库中根据该标识灯组的编号查找到该标识灯组的基准数据,基于基准数据获得允许的范围,并判断解析结果是否在范围内,若解析结果在范围内,则说明该标识灯组可继续使用,标识灯的故障检测流程结束;若解析结果不在范围内,则执行S303。Specifically, after the server receives the analysis result reported by the vehicle and the number of the identification light group corresponding to the analysis result, it finds the reference data of the identification light group in the database according to the number of the identification light group, and obtains the allowable range based on the reference data , And determine whether the analysis result is within the range. If the analysis result is within the range, it means that the identification lamp group can continue to be used, and the failure detection process of the identification lamp ends; if the analysis result is not within the range, execute S303.
举例来说,某一标识灯在地图中存储的三通道基准值为(247,9,13),对应的标准色为红色,其允许的范围为(225~255,0~30,0~30),若解析结果为(220,10,20),则该解析结果不在范围内;若解析结果为(240,10,20),则该解析结果在范围内。For example, the three-channel reference value stored in the map for a certain indicator light is (247,9,13), the corresponding standard color is red, and the allowable range is (225~255,0~30,0~30 ), if the analysis result is (220,10,20), the analysis result is not within the range; if the analysis result is (240,10,20), the analysis result is within the range.
需要说明的是,若服务器发现某处标识灯的解析结果虽然总在允许的范围内,但是大概率地与数据库中的基准数据相差较大,服务器也可以提醒相关人员提前预防标识灯的故障。It should be noted that, if the server finds that the analysis result of the indicator light in a certain place is always within the allowable range, but is likely to be significantly different from the reference data in the database, the server can also remind relevant personnel to prevent the indicator light failure in advance.
S403、更新该标识灯组,并更新服务器的数据。S403. Update the identification lamp group and update the data of the server.
具体地,误差不在范围内,即说明该标识灯组内的标识灯已发生器件老化,服务器会提醒用户需更换该标识灯组,同时计算已更换的标识灯组的颜色编码,并将其替换数据库中原标识灯组的数据,从而完成了数据库的更新。需要说明的是,若标识灯组仅有某个标 识灯老化,则仅需更换这一个标识灯,在数据库中更新对应标识灯的数据即可。Specifically, if the error is not within the range, it means that the identification lights in the identification light group have experienced device aging, and the server will remind the user that the identification light group needs to be replaced, and at the same time calculate the color code of the replaced identification light group, and replace it The data of the original identification lamp group in the database has completed the update of the database. It should be noted that if only one indicator lamp of the indicator lamp group is aging, only this one indicator lamp needs to be replaced and the data of the corresponding indicator lamp can be updated in the database.
需要说明的是,除了上述标识灯故障检测方法,还可以通过安排工程车定期巡检来解决标识灯的故障检测问题。具体地,安排工程车每隔一段时间对各组标识灯组进行拍摄、识别和解码,将解析结果与数据库内对应的数据进行对比,判断颜色误差是否在规定范围内,若不是,则更换标识灯组或标识灯组中的某个标识灯。It should be noted that, in addition to the above-mentioned identification lamp failure detection method, the problem of identification lamp failure detection can also be solved by arranging regular inspections of construction vehicles. Specifically, the engineering vehicle is arranged to photograph, identify and decode each group of identification light groups at regular intervals, and compare the analysis results with the corresponding data in the database to determine whether the color error is within the specified range, if not, replace the identification A light group or an identification light in an identification light group.
参见图13,基于图2或图3实施例所描述的系统架构,下面描述本申请实施例提供的一种车辆定位方法,其中,半封闭空间不妨以隧道为例、颜色装置不妨以标识灯组为例、定位装置不妨以定位光栅为例进行方案的示例性阐述,但本申请实施例不限定半封闭空间仅为隧道、颜色装置仅为标识灯组或者定位装置仅为定位光栅。需要说明的是,图13实施例中,隧道中设置了K组定位系统,每组定位系统包括一个定位光栅和一个摄像机,即有K个定位光栅和K个摄像机,K为大于1的整数。另外,标识灯组位于车辆上。图13实施例可以独立于图4、图5和图6实施例,也可以是对图4、图5和图6实施例的补充。该方法包括但不限于以下步骤:Referring to Fig. 13, based on the system architecture described in the embodiment of Fig. 2 or Fig. 3, the following describes a vehicle positioning method provided by an embodiment of the present application, in which a tunnel may be used as an example in a semi-enclosed space, and a color device may be used to identify light groups As an example, the positioning device may take the positioning grating as an example to illustrate the solution. However, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the semi-enclosed space to be only a tunnel, the color device is only an identification light group, or the positioning device is only a positioning grating. It should be noted that in the embodiment of FIG. 13, K groups of positioning systems are set in the tunnel, and each group of positioning systems includes a positioning grating and a camera, that is, there are K positioning gratings and K cameras, and K is an integer greater than 1. In addition, the identification light group is located on the vehicle. The embodiment in FIG. 13 may be independent of the embodiments in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 6, or may be a supplement to the embodiments in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. The method includes but is not limited to the following steps:
S501、车辆进入目标隧道前,车辆获取目标隧道的地图。本步骤具体可参考图4实施例中S201-S202的相关描述,这里不再赘述。S501: Before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle obtains a map of the target tunnel. For details of this step, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions of S201-S202 in the embodiment of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
S502、车辆进入目标隧道前,车辆根据颜色编码设置标识灯组的颜色。S502: Before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle sets the color of the identification light group according to the color code.
具体地,车辆上(例如,车辆的顶部)安装有一个标识灯组,标识灯组包含至少一个标识灯,每个标识灯可发出带颜色的可见光。车辆在进入目标隧道前,需要先根据颜色编码设置自身标识灯组的颜色,该颜色编码指示了本车辆的标识灯组的颜色和顺序。可选地,一具体实施中,该颜色编码可以是车辆从服务器中获取的,即车辆可以向服务器发送第二请求,服务器根据接收到的第二请求分配一个颜色编码给该车辆,以使车辆在进入目标隧道前根据该颜色编码配置该车辆的标识灯组的发光颜色。需要说明的是,不同车辆获得的颜色编码是不同的,以使不同车辆上的标识灯组呈现的颜色或颜色排列顺序不同,换句话说,即每辆车获取的颜色编码具有唯一性。Specifically, one identification light group is installed on the vehicle (for example, the top of the vehicle), the identification light group includes at least one identification light, and each identification light can emit colored visible light. Before the vehicle enters the target tunnel, it needs to set the color of its own identification light group according to the color code. The color code indicates the color and sequence of the identification light group of the vehicle. Optionally, in a specific implementation, the color code may be obtained by the vehicle from the server, that is, the vehicle may send a second request to the server, and the server allocates a color code to the vehicle according to the received second request, so that the vehicle Before entering the target tunnel, configure the luminous color of the vehicle's identification light group according to the color code. It should be noted that the color codes obtained by different vehicles are different, so that the colors or the order of the colors presented by the identification lamp groups on different vehicles are different. In other words, the color codes obtained by each vehicle are unique.
在一些可能的实施例中,车辆无需请求服务器分配颜色编码,车辆的标识灯组的颜色编码也可以在车辆出厂时就预先设置好的,每辆车的颜色编码具有唯一性。在车辆进入目标隧道时,车辆根据该颜色编码设置标识灯组中各个标识灯的发光颜色即可。In some possible embodiments, the vehicle does not need to request the server to assign a color code, and the color code of the vehicle's identification light group can also be preset when the vehicle leaves the factory, and the color code of each vehicle is unique. When the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the vehicle can set the luminous color of each indicator light in the indicator light group according to the color code.
需要说明的是,所谓颜色编码是指光源在RGB色彩空间的红(R)、绿(G)、蓝(B)三基色的混合比例(r,g,b),标识灯组中的每个标识灯都有其对应的颜色编码,车辆通过颜色编码设置标识灯中三基色的混合比例以获得预设的发光颜色。例如,若某个标识灯的颜色编码为(255,0,0),其意味着绿色分量和蓝色分量均为0,红色分量达到最大值,则根据该颜色编码设置后,该标识灯显示红色光。It should be noted that the so-called color coding refers to the mixing ratio (r, g, b) of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in the RGB color space of the light source, which identifies each of the lamp groups The identification lights have their corresponding color codes, and the vehicle sets the mixing ratio of the three primary colors in the identification lights through the color coding to obtain the preset luminous color. For example, if the color code of a certain indicator light is (255,0,0), it means that the green component and the blue component are both 0, and the red component reaches the maximum value. After the color code is set, the indicator light will display Red light.
S503、在车辆进入目标隧道后,服务器获取第Ki个摄像机采集的第二环境图像。S503: After the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the server obtains the second environment image collected by the Ki-th camera.
本申请实施例中,服务器接收第Ki个摄像机发送的第二环境图像,第二环境图像包括车辆上的标识灯组的图像,也就是说,车辆进入目标隧道后,目标隧道中的摄像机会采集当前视角下行驶的车辆的图像,并将采集到的图像发送给服务器以进行处理。示例性地,第二环境图像一般为RGB彩色图像或可见光图像。In the embodiment of this application, the server receives the second environment image sent by the Ki-th camera, the second environment image includes the image of the identification light group on the vehicle, that is, after the vehicle enters the target tunnel, the camera in the target tunnel will collect The image of the vehicle driving under the current view, and the collected image is sent to the server for processing. Exemplarily, the second environment image is generally an RGB color image or a visible light image.
参见图14A,图14A示例性地提供了一种车辆在隧道中的定位示意图,图14A只示例性地示出了一组对应的摄像机和定位光栅。如图14A所示,车辆的顶部设置有一个标识灯组,第Ki个摄像机与在第Ki个定位光栅处于同一位置的不同高度,即从图14A所示的侧视图角度看,第Ki个定位光栅和第Ki个摄像机位于垂直于地面的同一直线上。摄像机安装于隧道的天花板,定位光栅安装于隧道的侧壁,摄像机用于采集包含车辆上标识灯组的图像。在一些可能的实施例中,定位光栅也可以安装于其对应的摄像机的前方或者后方,但两者位置之间的差异应尽可能地小。Referring to Fig. 14A, Fig. 14A exemplarily provides a schematic diagram of the positioning of a vehicle in a tunnel, and Fig. 14A only exemplarily shows a set of corresponding cameras and positioning gratings. As shown in Figure 14A, there is an identification light set on the top of the vehicle. The Ki-th camera and the Ki-th positioning grating are at different heights at the same position, that is, from the side view shown in Figure 14A, the Ki-th positioning The grating and the Ki-th camera are located on the same straight line perpendicular to the ground. The camera is installed on the ceiling of the tunnel, and the positioning grating is installed on the side wall of the tunnel. The camera is used to collect images containing the identification lights on the vehicle. In some possible embodiments, the positioning grating can also be installed in front of or behind the corresponding camera, but the difference between the positions of the two should be as small as possible.
S504、服务器根据第二环境图像识别车辆的标识灯组,确定车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第三距离。S504: The server recognizes the identification light group of the vehicle according to the second environment image, and determines the third distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th positioning grating.
本申请实施例中,服务器在获得包含车辆的标识灯组的第二环境图像后,一方面,服务器需先通过图像处理算法识别和解析第二环境图像中车辆上标识灯组的颜色,根据识别出的标识灯组计算该标识灯组所在的车辆距离第Ki个摄像机的第四距离(如图14A);另一方面,服务器结合第Ki个摄像机的离地高度以及第四距离,即可获得车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第三距离(如图14A)。In the embodiment of the present application, after the server obtains the second environmental image containing the identification light group of the vehicle, on the one hand, the server needs to first recognize and analyze the color of the identification light group on the vehicle in the second environmental image through the image processing algorithm, and according to the recognition Calculate the fourth distance from the Ki-th camera to the vehicle where the identification light group is located (as shown in Figure 14A); on the other hand, the server combines the ground height and the fourth distance of the Ki-th camera to obtain The third distance from the vehicle to the Ki-th positioning grating (see Figure 14A).
需要说明的是,第四距离是指标识灯组所在的车辆距离第Ki个摄像机的空间距离,第三距离是指标识灯组所在的车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的距离,具体地,第三距离为标识灯组所在的车辆距离垂直平面的距离,该垂直平面为第Ki个定位光栅所在的与车辆行驶方向垂直的平面。It should be noted that the fourth distance refers to the spatial distance between the vehicle where the identification light group is located and the Ki-th camera, and the third distance refers to the distance between the vehicle where the identification light group is located and the Ki-th positioning grating. Specifically, the third The distance is the distance from the vertical plane of the vehicle where the identification light group is located, and the vertical plane is the plane perpendicular to the driving direction of the vehicle where the Ki-th positioning grating is located.
一具体实施中,服务器可通过如下方式获得车辆距离第Ki个摄像机的距离:即利用图像处理算法或目标检测算法基于车辆的标识灯组的形状(例如,矩形或椭圆形等)识别出标识灯组,并对识别出的标识灯组的颜色进行解析获得解析结果,该解析结果即为该标识灯组对应的颜色编码,该解析结果指示了车辆的标识灯组的颜色和排列顺序;服务器识别出车辆的标识灯组后即可获得该标识灯组在第二环境图像中的像素位置以及该标识灯组在第二环境图像中的尺寸大小,再结合标识灯组实际的尺寸信息,则可确定该标识灯组距离第Ki个摄像机的距离,该距离也近似等同于该标识灯组所在的车辆距离第Ki个摄像机的第四距离。在确定了车辆距离第Ki个摄像机的第四距离后,结合第Ki个摄像机的离地高度(预存储至服务器中)与车辆的标识灯组的离地高度,根据勾股定理即可计算车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第三距离。In a specific implementation, the server can obtain the distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th camera by using an image processing algorithm or a target detection algorithm to identify the indicator light based on the shape of the vehicle’s indicator light group (for example, rectangle or ellipse, etc.) The analysis result is the color code corresponding to the identification light group by analyzing the color of the identified identification light group, and the analysis result indicates the color and arrangement order of the identification light group of the vehicle; server identification After the identification lamp group of the vehicle is obtained, the pixel position of the identification lamp group in the second environment image and the size of the identification lamp group in the second environment image can be obtained, combined with the actual size information of the identification lamp group, then Determine the distance between the identification light group and the Ki-th camera, and this distance is also approximately equal to the fourth distance between the vehicle where the identification light group is located and the Ki-th camera. After determining the fourth distance between the vehicle and the Ki-th camera, combining the ground height of the Ki-th camera (pre-stored in the server) and the ground height of the vehicle's identification light group, the vehicle can be calculated according to the Pythagorean theorem The third distance from the Ki-th positioning grating.
在一些可能的实施例中,服务器在获得标识灯组所在的车辆距离第Ki个摄像机的第四距离后,还可以结合第Ki个摄像机拍摄该标识灯组时的俯仰角,获得车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第三距离。In some possible embodiments, after obtaining the fourth distance from the Ki-th camera to the vehicle where the identification light group is located, the server may also combine the pitch angle of the Ki-th camera when shooting the identification light group to obtain the Ki-th vehicle distance. The third distance of the positioning grating.
需要说明的是,在一些可能的实施例中,第Ki个定位光栅和第Ki个摄像机位于相近位置的不同高度,即两者可以一前一后安装,不妨以图14B为例,如图14B中,第Ki个摄像机比第Ki个定位光栅更靠近设置有标识灯组的车辆,在此情况下,从图14B所示的侧视角度看,第Ki个定位光栅和第Ki个摄像机不再位于垂直于地面的同条直线上,那么服务器计算标识灯组所在的车辆与第Ki个定位光栅的第三距离时,除了需要依据图14B所示的第四距离、标识灯组与第Ki个摄像机之间的垂直高度差(即可由标识灯组的离地高度和第Ki个标识灯组高度获得)外,还需要依据第Ki个摄像机和第Ki个定位光栅在车 辆行驶方向上的距离差。It should be noted that in some possible embodiments, the Ki-th positioning grating and the Ki-th camera are located at different heights at similar positions, that is, the two can be installed one after the other. Take Figure 14B as an example, as shown in Figure 14B. In this case, the Ki-th camera is closer to the vehicle equipped with the identification light group than the Ki-th positioning grating. In this case, from the side view shown in Figure 14B, the Ki-th positioning grating and the Ki-th camera are no longer Located on the same straight line perpendicular to the ground, when the server calculates the third distance between the vehicle in which the identification light group is located and the Ki-th positioning grating, in addition to the fourth distance shown in Figure 14B, the identification light group and the Ki-th In addition to the vertical height difference between the cameras (that can be obtained from the ground clearance of the marking light group and the height of the Ki-th marking light group), it also needs to be based on the distance difference between the Ki-th camera and the Ki-th positioning grating in the direction of the vehicle. .
需要说明的是,关于获得车辆的标识灯组的离地高度的方式可为如下方式:若车辆的标识灯组的颜色编码是服务器分配的,那么在车辆向服务器发送的第二请求中还携带有本车辆上标识灯组的离地高度;若车辆的标识灯组的颜色编码为车辆出厂时预先设置好的,那么车辆在进入隧道前,需向服务器发送第一信息,第一信息中包括该车辆的标识灯组的颜色编码以及该车辆上的标识灯组的离地高度,第一信息用于指示服务器建立颜色编码与其对应的离地高度之间的映射关系表。因此,服务器根据第二环境图像获得车辆的标识灯组颜色的解析结果后,根据该解析结果查找颜色编码-离地高度映射表获得其对应的标识灯组的离地高度即可。需要说明的是,若车辆的标识灯组的颜色编码为车辆出厂时预先设置好的,且摄像机可直接对采集到的第二环境图像进行处理(例如,识别标识灯组、计算第三距离等),则车辆在进入隧道前,也可直接将第一信息发送给摄像机。It should be noted that the way to obtain the ground clearance of the vehicle's identification light group can be as follows: if the color code of the vehicle's identification light group is assigned by the server, then the second request sent by the vehicle to the server also carries There is the ground clearance of the identification light group on the vehicle; if the color code of the identification light group of the vehicle is preset when the vehicle leaves the factory, the vehicle needs to send the first information to the server before entering the tunnel. The first information includes The color code of the identification light group of the vehicle and the ground height of the identification light group on the vehicle, and the first information is used to instruct the server to establish a mapping relationship table between the color code and the corresponding ground height. Therefore, after the server obtains the analysis result of the color of the identification light group of the vehicle according to the second environment image, it can search the color code-ground height mapping table according to the analysis result to obtain the ground height of the corresponding identification light group. It should be noted that if the color code of the identification light group of the vehicle is preset when the vehicle leaves the factory, and the camera can directly process the collected second environment image (for example, identify the identification light group, calculate the third distance, etc. ), the vehicle can also directly send the first information to the camera before entering the tunnel.
对识别出的标识灯组的颜色进行解析获得的解析结果表征的可以是标识灯组中的各颜色在RGB色彩空间中R、G、B三通道的值,也可以是各颜色在HSV色彩空间、HSL色彩空间或其他色彩空间中各颜色通道的取值,本申请不做限定。但该解析结果对应的颜色空间需与车辆的标识灯组的颜色编码对应的颜色空间一致。The analysis result obtained by analyzing the color of the identified identification lamp group can be characterized by the value of the R, G, and B three channels of each color in the identification lamp group in the RGB color space, or each color in the HSV color space The value of each color channel in the HSL color space or other color spaces is not limited in this application. However, the color space corresponding to the analysis result needs to be consistent with the color space corresponding to the color code of the vehicle's identification light group.
需要说明的是,关于标识灯组的像素位置的获取、标识灯组的颜色的解析等操作可参考S304中相关描述,为了说明书的简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that, for operations such as obtaining the pixel position of the identification lamp group and analyzing the color of the identification lamp group, reference may be made to the related description in S304. For the sake of brevity of the description, details are not repeated here.
S505、服务器根据第三距离判断车辆是否在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。S505: The server judges whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the third distance.
本申请实施例中,服务器在获得车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第三距离后,比较第三距离与预设阈值的大小,当第三距离小于等于预设阈值时,则服务器可以确定该车辆位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内;当第三距离大于预设阈值时,则服务器可以确定该车辆不位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。需要说明的是,预设阈值可以是1米、1.5米、2.5米、3米或其他值,本申请不做具体限定。In the embodiment of the present application, after obtaining the third distance of the vehicle from the Ki-th positioning grating, the server compares the third distance with a preset threshold. When the third distance is less than or equal to the preset threshold, the server can determine the vehicle It is located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating; when the third distance is greater than the preset threshold, the server may determine that the vehicle is not located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating. It should be noted that the preset threshold value may be 1 meter, 1.5 meters, 2.5 meters, 3 meters or other values, which are not specifically limited in this application.
若服务器判断出某车辆在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内时,服务器还需记录该车辆的标识灯组的颜色的解析结果,该解析结果指示了标识灯组中各标识灯的颜色和顺序。If the server determines that a vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, the server also needs to record the analysis result of the color of the vehicle's identification light group. The analysis result indicates the color and the color of each identification light in the identification light group. order.
需要说明的是,S503-S505是服务器监测车辆是否在第Ki定位光栅的预设范围内的一种方法的示例性说明。在一些可能的实施例中,也可以无需服务器的参与而直接由隧道中各区域的摄像机监测车辆是否位于其对应的定位光栅的预设范围内。以第Ki摄像机为例进行说明,第Ki个摄像机采集到第二环境图像后,第Ki个摄像机直接对第二环境图像进行处理(例如,识别车辆的标识灯组,解压标识灯组的颜色等),并计算车辆距离第Ki个定位光栅的第三距离,在第三距离小于等于预设范围时,即说明该车辆在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内,同时记录该车辆上标识灯组的颜色的解析结果,此解析结果指示了车辆上标识灯组的颜色和顺序。It should be noted that S503-S505 are exemplary descriptions of a method for the server to monitor whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating. In some possible embodiments, cameras in each area of the tunnel may directly monitor whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of its corresponding positioning grating without the participation of the server. Take the Ki-th camera as an example. After the Ki-th camera collects the second environment image, the Ki-th camera directly processes the second environment image (for example, identifying the vehicle's identification light group, decompressing the color of the identification light group, etc. ), and calculate the third distance of the vehicle from the Ki-th positioning grating. When the third distance is less than or equal to the preset range, it means that the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, and at the same time record the marking lights on the vehicle The analysis result of the color of the group, this analysis result indicates the color and order of the identification light group on the vehicle.
需要说明的是,无论是服务器还是摄像机处理第二环境图像,在一些可能的实施例中,在隧道中具有多车道的情况下,可能出现多辆车并排行驶,在对第Ki个摄像机采集的第二环境图像进行处理后发现有多个车道上的车同时位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内,则对这些车辆的标识灯组的颜色依次进行解析并记录获得的多个解析结果。It should be noted that whether the server or the camera processes the second environment image, in some possible embodiments, in the case of multiple lanes in the tunnel, multiple vehicles may drive side by side. After the second environment image is processed, it is found that there are vehicles on multiple lanes located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating at the same time, then the colors of the identification light groups of these vehicles are sequentially analyzed and the multiple analysis results obtained are recorded.
S506、在车辆位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内时,服务器向外发送第二广播信息。S506: When the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, the server sends the second broadcast information to the outside.
本申请实施例中,服务器在确定车辆位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内时,服务器向外发送第二广播信息,第二广播信息携带指示信息,该指示信息指示了一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序,由于一个标识灯组包括至少一个标识灯,故指示信息也相当于指示了该车辆上的标识灯组颜色和顺序。第二广播信息用于指示车辆根据第二广播信息确定自身是否在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。In the embodiment of the present application, when the server determines that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, the server sends out second broadcast information. The second broadcast information carries instruction information, and the instruction information indicates one or more identifiers. The color and sequence of the lights. Since one identification light group includes at least one identification light, the indication information is also equivalent to indicating the color and sequence of the identification light group on the vehicle. The second broadcast information is used to instruct the vehicle to determine whether it is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the second broadcast information.
在一些可能的实施例中,若由摄像机直接监测车辆是否位于其对应的定位装置的预设范围内,不妨以第Ki个摄像机为例,若第Ki个摄像机监测到车辆位于第Ki个定位装置的预设范围内,第Ki摄像机可以直接向外发送第二广播信息,第二广播信息指示了该车辆上标识灯组的颜色和顺序,以使车辆根据第二广播信息判断自身是否在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。In some possible embodiments, if the camera directly monitors whether the vehicle is within the preset range of its corresponding positioning device, take the Ki-th camera as an example, if the Ki-th camera detects that the vehicle is located in the Ki-th positioning device Within the preset range, the Ki-th camera can directly send out the second broadcast information. The second broadcast information indicates the color and sequence of the identification light group on the vehicle, so that the vehicle can judge whether it is in the Ki-th according to the second broadcast information. Within the preset range of a positioning grating.
在一些可能的实施例中,在隧道中具有多个车道的情况下,可能出现多辆并排行驶的车辆均位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内,在此情况下,第二广播信息携带的指示信息指示了至少一个标识灯组的颜色和顺序,这些标识灯组为位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内的多辆车的标识灯组。In some possible embodiments, when there are multiple lanes in the tunnel, multiple vehicles driving side by side may all be located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating. In this case, the second broadcast information carries The indication information of indicates the color and sequence of at least one identification light group, which are the identification light groups of multiple vehicles located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating.
S507、车辆接收第二广播信息,根据第二广播信息确定自身是否在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。S507. The vehicle receives the second broadcast information, and determines whether it is within a preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the second broadcast information.
本申请实施例中,车辆接收到第二广播信息后,根据第二广播信息确定自身是否在第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。具体地,车辆根据第二广播信息中指示的标识灯组中各标识灯的颜色和顺序匹配自身车辆上的标识灯组,即比较第二广播信息携带的颜色编码与车辆自身的标识灯组的颜色编码是否相同,若相同,则匹配成功,说明本车辆即为或者属于第二广播信息指示的标识灯组所在的车辆,即本车辆当前位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内;若不相同,则匹配失败,说明本车辆当前不位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内。In the embodiment of the present application, after receiving the second broadcast information, the vehicle determines whether it is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating according to the second broadcast information. Specifically, the vehicle matches the identification light group on its own vehicle according to the color and sequence of the identification lights in the identification light group indicated in the second broadcast information, that is, compares the color code carried in the second broadcast information with that of the vehicle's own identification light group. Whether the color codes are the same, if they are the same, the matching is successful, indicating that the vehicle is or belongs to the vehicle where the identification light group indicated by the second broadcast information is located, that is, the vehicle is currently within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating; if not If they are the same, the matching fails, indicating that the vehicle is not currently located within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating.
S508、在第Ki个定位光栅被触发时,第Ki个定位光栅向外发送第一广播信息。本步骤具体可参考图3实施例中S103的相关描述,这里不再赘述。需要说明的是,第Ki个定位光栅即为S103中的定位系统。S508: When the Ki-th positioning grating is triggered, the Ki-th positioning grating sends out the first broadcast information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S103 in the embodiment of FIG. 3, which will not be repeated here. It should be noted that the Ki-th positioning grating is the positioning system in S103.
S509、车辆接收第一广播信息,在车辆位于第Ki个定位光栅的预设范围内时,获取地图中第Ki个定位光栅的位置信息,并根据该位置信息在地图中对车辆进行定位。本步骤具体可参考图5实施例中S204的相关描述,这里不再赘述。S509. The vehicle receives the first broadcast information, and when the vehicle is within the preset range of the Ki-th positioning grating, obtains the position information of the Ki-th positioning grating in the map, and locates the vehicle on the map according to the position information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S204 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
S510、在车辆触发下一个定位光栅前,获取车辆的运动信息,根据车辆的位置信息和运动信息在地图中对车辆进行导航。本步骤具体可参考图5实施例中S205的相关描述,这里不再赘述。S510: Before the vehicle triggers the next positioning grating, the vehicle's motion information is acquired, and the vehicle is navigated on the map according to the vehicle's position information and the motion information. For details of this step, reference may be made to the related description of S205 in the embodiment of FIG. 5, which will not be repeated here.
可以看到,实施本申请实施例,在卫星信号不佳的隧道中,通过在隧道中设置定位光栅和摄像机辅助车辆实现在隧道中的精确定位,摄像机通过识别车辆上的标识灯组确定车辆与该标识灯组对应的定位光栅的位置关系,结合来自该定位光栅的触发信息即可实现车辆在隧道中的精确定位,有效解决了在卫星信号被遮挡或者屏蔽的隧道、地下等场景下车辆无法定位或定位不准的问题,提升了车辆定位的鲁棒性,降低了信号不佳的半封闭空间中车辆定位的施工成本。It can be seen that in the implementation of the embodiment of this application, in tunnels with poor satellite signals, positioning gratings and cameras are set in the tunnel to assist the vehicle to achieve precise positioning in the tunnel. The camera determines the vehicle and the The positional relationship of the positioning grating corresponding to the identification light group, combined with the trigger information from the positioning grating, can realize the precise positioning of the vehicle in the tunnel, which effectively solves the problem that the vehicle cannot be in the tunnel or underground where the satellite signal is blocked or shielded. The problem of positioning or inaccurate positioning improves the robustness of vehicle positioning and reduces the construction cost of vehicle positioning in a semi-enclosed space with poor signal.
下面以一些具体的应用场景来进一步说明图13实施例所述的方法。Hereinafter, some specific application scenarios are used to further illustrate the method described in the embodiment in FIG. 13.
参见图15,车辆A和车辆B行驶于某隧道中,车辆A和车辆B均设置有一个标识灯组,标识灯组A的颜色以及顺序和标识灯组B的颜色以及顺序不同,车辆A和车辆B均已通过第1个定位光栅,且在接近第2个定位光栅的过程中。隧道中的第2个摄像机采集该视角下的车辆上标识灯组的图像,并将采集到的标识灯组的图像发送给服务器,服务器对接收到的图像进行处理,监测到车辆A距离第2个定位光栅的距离等于预设阈值,即说明车辆A当前位于第2个定位光栅的预设范围内,因此,服务器向外发送指示了标识灯组A以及摄像机编号2的广播信息。对车辆A来说,车辆A接收到该广播信息后,将广播信息中指示的标识灯组与自身的标识灯组A匹配,匹配成功,则车辆A可以确定自身位于第2个定位光栅的预设范围内,故车辆A在地图中获取第2个定位光栅在WGS84坐标系下的位置坐标(B2,L2,H2)并更新成自己当前的位置坐标,显示在车辆的显示屏上。对于车辆B来说,车辆B接收到该广播信息后,将广播信息中指示的标识灯组与自身的标识灯组B匹配,匹配失败,故车辆B可以确定自身不位于第2个定位光栅的预设范围内,因此车辆B的显示屏上显示的位置坐标为(B,L,H),并未更新成第2个定位光栅的位置坐标。Referring to Figure 15, Vehicle A and Vehicle B are driving in a tunnel. Both Vehicle A and Vehicle B are equipped with an identification light group. The color and sequence of identification light group A are different from the color and sequence of identification light group B. Vehicle A and Vehicle B has passed the first positioning grating and is approaching the second positioning grating. The second camera in the tunnel collects the image of the identification lamp group on the vehicle at this angle of view, and sends the collected image of the identification lamp group to the server. The server processes the received image and monitors that the distance from vehicle A is the second The distance of the two positioning gratings is equal to the preset threshold, which means that the vehicle A is currently located within the preset range of the second positioning grating. Therefore, the server sends out broadcast information indicating the identification light group A and the camera number 2. For vehicle A, after receiving the broadcast information, vehicle A matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group A. If the matching is successful, then vehicle A can determine that it is in the preset position of the second positioning grating. Set within the range, so vehicle A obtains the position coordinates (B2, L2, H2) of the second positioning grating in the WGS84 coordinate system on the map and updates it to its current position coordinates, and displays it on the vehicle's display screen. For vehicle B, after receiving the broadcast information, vehicle B matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group B. The matching fails. Therefore, vehicle B can determine that it is not located in the second positioning grating. Within the preset range, therefore, the position coordinates displayed on the display screen of the vehicle B are (B, L, H), which has not been updated to the position coordinates of the second positioning grating.
参见图16,车辆A和车辆B行驶于某隧道中,车辆A和车辆B均设置有一个标识灯组,标识灯组A的颜色以及顺序和标识灯组B的颜色以及顺序不同,车辆A和车辆B均已通过第1个定位光栅,且在接近第2个定位光栅的过程中。隧道中的第2个摄像机采集该视角下的车辆上标识灯组的图像,并对采集到的标识灯组的图像进行处理,监测到标识灯组A所在的车辆A距离第2个定位光栅的距离等于预设阈值,即说明车辆A当前位于第2个定位光栅的预设范围内,因此,第2个摄像机向外发送指示了标识灯组A以及摄像机编号2的广播信息。对车辆A来说,车辆A接收到该广播信息后,将广播信息中指示的标识灯组与自身的标识灯组A匹配,匹配成功,则车辆A可以确定自身位于第2个定位光栅的预设范围内,故车辆A在地图中获取第2个定位光栅在WGS84坐标系下的位置坐标(B2,L2,H2)并更新成自己当前的位置坐标显示在车辆的显示屏上。对于车辆B来说,车辆B接收到该广播信息后,将广播信息中指示的标识灯组与自身的标识灯组B匹配,匹配失败,故车辆B可以确定自身不位于第2个定位光栅的预设范围内,因此车辆B的显示屏上显示的位置坐标为(B,L,H),并未更新成第2个定位光栅的位置坐标。Refer to Figure 16, Vehicle A and Vehicle B are driving in a tunnel. Both Vehicle A and Vehicle B are equipped with an identification light group. The color and sequence of the identification light group A are different from the color and sequence of the identification light group B. Vehicle A and Vehicle B has passed the first positioning grating and is approaching the second positioning grating. The second camera in the tunnel collects the image of the identification light group on the vehicle at this angle of view, and processes the collected image of the identification light group, and monitors that the vehicle A where the identification light group A is located is away from the second positioning grating. The distance is equal to the preset threshold, which means that vehicle A is currently within the preset range of the second positioning grating. Therefore, the second camera sends out broadcast information indicating the identification light group A and camera number 2. For vehicle A, after receiving the broadcast information, vehicle A matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group A. If the matching is successful, then vehicle A can determine that it is in the preset position of the second positioning grating. Set the range, so vehicle A obtains the position coordinates (B2, L2, H2) of the second positioning grating in the WGS84 coordinate system on the map and updates it to its current position coordinates and displays it on the vehicle's display screen. For vehicle B, after receiving the broadcast information, vehicle B matches the identification light group indicated in the broadcast information with its own identification light group B. The matching fails. Therefore, vehicle B can determine that it is not located in the second positioning grating. Within the preset range, therefore, the position coordinates displayed on the display screen of the vehicle B are (B, L, H), which has not been updated to the position coordinates of the second positioning grating.
参见图17,图17是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的结构示意图,装置30至少包括处理器110、存储器111、接收器112、发送器113、图像采集装置114和惯性测量元件115,该接收器112和发送器113也可以替换为通信接口,用于为处理器110提供信息输入和/或输出。可选的,存储器111、接收器112、发送器113、图像采集装置114、惯性测量元件115和处理器110通过总线连接或耦合。装置30可为图1中的车辆。Refer to FIG. 17, which is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The device 30 at least includes a processor 110, a memory 111, a receiver 112, a transmitter 113, an image acquisition device 114, and an inertial measurement element 115. The receiver 112 and the transmitter 113 can also be replaced with communication interfaces for providing information input and/or output for the processor 110. Optionally, the memory 111, the receiver 112, the transmitter 113, the image acquisition device 114, the inertial measurement element 115, and the processor 110 are connected or coupled via a bus. The device 30 may be the vehicle in FIG. 1.
接收器112用于接收来自服务器/路侧单元/其他车辆的半封闭空间(例如,隧道)的地图,接收器112还用于接收定位系统(即定位光栅)被触发时发送的第一广播信息。发送器113用于向服务器发送第一请求以获取半封闭空间的地图。接收器112和发送器113可包括用于直接或通过空中接口与车内的设备、传感器或其它实体设备通信的天线和芯片集。发送器113和收发器112组成通信模块,通信模块可被配置为根据一个或多个其它类型的 无线通信(例如,协议)来接收和发送信息,所述无线通信诸如蓝牙、IEEE 802.11通信协议、蜂窝技术、全球微波互联接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)或LTE(Long Term Evolution,长期演进)、ZigBee协议、专用短程通信(Dedicated Short Range Communications,DSRC)以及RFID(Radio Frequency Identification,射频识别)通信,等等。The receiver 112 is used to receive a map of a semi-enclosed space (for example, a tunnel) from the server/roadside unit/other vehicles, and the receiver 112 is also used to receive the first broadcast information sent when the positioning system (ie, positioning raster) is triggered . The transmitter 113 is configured to send a first request to the server to obtain a map of the semi-enclosed space. The receiver 112 and the transmitter 113 may include antennas and chipsets for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface. The transmitter 113 and the transceiver 112 constitute a communication module. The communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
图像采集装置114用于拍摄车辆行驶前方的第一环境图像,第一环境图像中包含半封闭空间中颜色装置的图像。图像采集装置114包括摄像头,也可以包括深度传感器、RGB图像传感器或结构光图像传感器中的一个或多个。图像采集装置114可以是摄像机、相机或其他具有图像采集功能的装置。The image acquisition device 114 is used to capture a first environment image in front of the vehicle, and the first environment image includes an image of a color device in a semi-enclosed space. The image acquisition device 114 includes a camera, and may also include one or more of a depth sensor, an RGB image sensor, or a structured light image sensor. The image acquisition device 114 may be a video camera, a camera, or other devices with an image acquisition function.
惯性测量元件115用于获取车辆的运动信息,例如,车辆的速度、加速度和运动方向等,以使处理器110根据惯性测量元件115获得的信息进行导航。惯性测量元件115包括加速度计和陀螺仪,其中,加速度计用于测量车辆当前的加速度,陀螺仪用于检测车辆运动的方向和速度。The inertial measurement element 115 is used to obtain movement information of the vehicle, for example, the speed, acceleration, and movement direction of the vehicle, so that the processor 110 can navigate according to the information obtained by the inertial measurement element 115. The inertial measurement element 115 includes an accelerometer and a gyroscope, where the accelerometer is used to measure the current acceleration of the vehicle, and the gyroscope is used to detect the direction and speed of the vehicle's movement.
处理器110执行各操作的具体实现可参考上述方法实施例中识别第一环境图像中的颜色装置、计算车辆距离定位系统的第一距离、对车辆进行定位等具体操作。处理器110可以由一个或者多个通用处理器构成,例如中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),或者CPU和硬件芯片的组合。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、可编程逻辑器件(Programmable Logic Device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(Complex Programmable Logic Device,CPLD)、现场可编程逻辑门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、通用阵列逻辑(Generic Array Logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The specific implementation of each operation performed by the processor 110 may refer to specific operations such as identifying the color device in the first environment image, calculating the first distance of the vehicle distance positioning system, and positioning the vehicle in the foregoing method embodiment. The processor 110 may be composed of one or more general-purpose processors, such as a central processing unit (CPU), or a combination of a CPU and a hardware chip. The aforementioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (Programmable Logic Device, PLD), or a combination thereof. The above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device, CPLD), a field programmable logic gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), a general array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL), or any combination thereof.
存储器111可以包括易失性存储器(Volatile Memory),例如随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM);存储器111也可以包括非易失性存储器(Non-Volatile Memory),例如只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、快闪存储器(Flash Memory)、硬盘(Hard Disk Drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(Solid-State Drive,SSD);存储器111还可以包括上述种类的组合。存储器111可以存储程序以及数据,其中,存储的程序包括:目标识别程序、颜色解析程序、惯性导航程序等,存储的数据包括:半封闭空间的地图、颜色装置(例如,标识灯组)的解析结果、车辆的运动信息等。存储器111可以单独存在,也可以集成于处理器110内部。The memory 111 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 111 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 111 may also include a combination of the above types. The memory 111 can store programs and data. The stored programs include target recognition programs, color analysis programs, inertial navigation programs, etc., and the stored data includes: semi-enclosed space maps, color devices (for example, identification light groups) analysis Results, vehicle movement information, etc. The memory 111 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 110.
本申请实施例中,装置30用于实现上述图4实施例所描述的车辆侧的方法。In the embodiment of the present application, the device 30 is used to implement the method on the vehicle side described in the embodiment in FIG. 4.
参见图18,图18是本申请实施例提供的又一种装置的结构示意图,装置40至少包括处理器210、存储器211、接收器212、发送器213、颜色装置214和惯性测量元件215,该接收器212和发送器213也可以替换为通信接口,用于为处理器210提供信息输入和/或输出。可选的,存储器211、接收器212、发送器213、惯性测量元件215和处理器210通过总线连接或耦合。装置40可为图2和图3中的车辆。Referring to FIG. 18, FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of another device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The device 40 at least includes a processor 210, a memory 211, a receiver 212, a transmitter 213, a color device 214, and an inertial measurement element 215. The receiver 212 and the transmitter 213 can also be replaced with communication interfaces for providing information input and/or output for the processor 210. Optionally, the memory 211, the receiver 212, the transmitter 213, the inertial measurement element 215, and the processor 210 are connected or coupled via a bus. The device 40 may be the vehicle in FIGS. 2 and 3.
发送器213用于向服务器发送第一请求以获得半封闭空间的地图,在一些可能的实施例中,发送器214还用于向服务器发送第一信息,第一信息中携带有装置40的颜色装置 214的颜色编码以及颜色装置214的离地高度。接收器212用于接收服务器发送的半封闭空间的地图,接收器212还用于接收第二广播信息以及来自定位系统(如,定位光栅)的第一广播信息。在一些可能的实施例中,接收器212还可以接收来自其他车辆或者路侧单元发送的半封闭空间的地图。The transmitter 213 is used to send a first request to the server to obtain a map of the semi-enclosed space. In some possible embodiments, the transmitter 214 is also used to send first information to the server. The first information carries the color of the device 40. The color coding of the device 214 and the height of the color device 214 from the ground. The receiver 212 is used for receiving the map of the semi-enclosed space sent by the server, and the receiver 212 is also used for receiving the second broadcast information and the first broadcast information from the positioning system (eg, positioning raster). In some possible embodiments, the receiver 212 may also receive a semi-enclosed space map sent from other vehicles or roadside units.
接收器212和发送器213可包括用于直接或通过空中接口与车内的设备、传感器或其它实体设备通信的天线和芯片集。发送器213和收发器212组成通信模块,通信模块可被配置为根据一个或多个其它类型的无线通信(例如,协议)来接收和发送信息,所述无线通信诸如蓝牙、IEEE 802.11通信协议、蜂窝技术、全球微波互联接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)或LTE(Long Term Evolution,长期演进)、ZigBee协议、专用短程通信(Dedicated Short Range Communications,DSRC)以及RFID(Radio Frequency Identification,射频识别)通信,等等。The receiver 212 and the transmitter 213 may include antennas and chipsets for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface. The transmitter 213 and the transceiver 212 constitute a communication module, and the communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
颜色装置214用于供半封闭空间中的图像采集装置(例如,摄像机)拍摄以获得车辆上的颜色装置214的图像。颜色装置214可以是一个或多个标识灯或其他带颜色的可发光器件,也可以是带颜色的金属板或者其他有颜色的装置。The color device 214 is used for shooting by an image acquisition device (for example, a camera) in a semi-enclosed space to obtain an image of the color device 214 on the vehicle. The color device 214 may be one or more identification lights or other colored light-emitting devices, and may also be a colored metal plate or other colored devices.
惯性测量元件215用于获取车辆的运动信息,例如,车辆的速度、加速度和运动方向等,以使处理器210根据惯性测量元件215获得的信息进行导航。惯性测量元件215包括加速度计和陀螺仪,其中,加速度计用于测量车辆当前的加速度,陀螺仪用于检测车辆运动的方向和速度。The inertial measurement element 215 is used to obtain movement information of the vehicle, for example, the speed, acceleration, and movement direction of the vehicle, so that the processor 210 can navigate according to the information obtained by the inertial measurement element 215. The inertial measurement element 215 includes an accelerometer and a gyroscope, where the accelerometer is used to measure the current acceleration of the vehicle, and the gyroscope is used to detect the direction and speed of the vehicle's movement.
处理器210执行各操作的具体实现可参考上述方法实施例中根据第二广播信息确定自身是否在定位光栅的预设范围内、对车辆进行定位等具体操作、对车辆进行导航等具体操作。处理器210可以由一个或者多个通用处理器构成,例如中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),或者CPU和硬件芯片的组合。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、可编程逻辑器件(Programmable Logic Device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(Complex Programmable Logic Device,CPLD)、现场可编程逻辑门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、通用阵列逻辑(Generic Array Logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The specific implementation of each operation performed by the processor 210 may refer to specific operations such as determining whether it is within the preset range of the positioning grating according to the second broadcast information in the foregoing method embodiment, positioning the vehicle, and navigating the vehicle. The processor 210 may be composed of one or more general-purpose processors, such as a central processing unit (CPU), or a combination of a CPU and a hardware chip. The aforementioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (Programmable Logic Device, PLD), or a combination thereof. The above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device, CPLD), a field programmable logic gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), a general array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL), or any combination thereof.
存储器211可以包括易失性存储器(Volatile Memory),例如随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM);存储器211也可以包括非易失性存储器(Non-Volatile Memory),例如只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、快闪存储器(Flash Memory)、硬盘(Hard Disk Drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(Solid-State Drive,SSD);存储器211还可以包括上述种类的组合。存储器211可以存储程序以及数据,其中,存储的程序包括:颜色装置匹配程序、惯性导航程序等,存储的数据包括:半封闭空间的地图、颜色装置(例如,标识灯组)的颜色编码、车辆的运动信息等。存储器211可以单独存在,也可以集成于处理器210内部。The memory 211 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 211 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 211 may also include a combination of the above types. The memory 211 can store programs and data. The stored programs include color device matching programs, inertial navigation programs, etc. The stored data includes: semi-enclosed space maps, color devices (for example, identification light groups) color coding, vehicle Sports information, etc. The memory 211 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 210.
本申请实施例中,装置40用于实现上述图13实施例所描述的车辆侧的方法。In the embodiment of the present application, the device 40 is used to implement the method on the vehicle side described in the embodiment in FIG. 13.
参见图19,图19是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的结构示意图,装置50至少包括处理器310、存储器311、接收器312和发送器313,该接收器312和发送器313也可以替换 为通信接口,用于为处理器310提供信息输入和/或输出。可选的,存储器311、接收器312、发送器313和处理器310通过总线连接或耦合。装置50可为图2中的服务器或者图3中的摄像机。可选地,在装置50为图3中的摄像机时,装置50还包括摄像头314,用于采集装置40的颜色装置214的图像,摄像头314通过总线与处理器310、接收器312等连接或耦合。Refer to FIG. 19, which is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The device 50 includes at least a processor 310, a memory 311, a receiver 312, and a transmitter 313. The receiver 312 and the transmitter 313 can also be replaced It is a communication interface for providing information input and/or output for the processor 310. Optionally, the memory 311, the receiver 312, the transmitter 313, and the processor 310 are connected or coupled through a bus. The device 50 may be the server in FIG. 2 or the camera in FIG. 3. Optionally, when the device 50 is the camera in FIG. 3, the device 50 further includes a camera 314 for collecting images of the color device 214 of the device 40, and the camera 314 is connected or coupled to the processor 310, the receiver 312, etc. through a bus .
接收器312还用于接收装置40发送的第一信息,第一信息中携带有装置40的颜色装置214的颜色编码以及颜色装置214的离地高度。在装置50为图2中的服务器时,接收器312还用于接收图2中摄像机发送的采集的装置40颜色装置214的图像,在一些可能的实施例中,接收器312还用于接收装置30或者装置40发送的第一请求,第一请求用于指示装置50发送半封闭空间的地图。在装置50为图3中的摄像机时,接收器312还用于从摄像头314处获取其采集的颜色装置214的图像以供处理器310进行处理。The receiver 312 is also used to receive the first information sent by the device 40. The first information carries the color code of the color device 214 of the device 40 and the height of the color device 214 from the ground. When the device 50 is the server in FIG. 2, the receiver 312 is also used to receive the captured image of the color device 214 of the device 40 sent by the camera in FIG. 2. In some possible embodiments, the receiver 312 is also used to receive the device 30 or the first request sent by the device 40, the first request is used to instruct the device 50 to send a map of the semi-enclosed space. When the device 50 is the camera in FIG. 3, the receiver 312 is also used to obtain the image of the color device 214 collected by the camera 314 for processing by the processor 310.
发送器313用于向装置40发送第二广播信息,第二广播信息携带的指示信息指示了位于定位光栅的预设范围内的车辆上颜色装置的颜色和顺序,以便于装置40根据第二广播信息确定自身是否在定位系统(如,定位光栅)的预设范围内。在一些可能的实施例中,发送器313还用于向装置30或装置40发送半封闭空间的地图。The transmitter 313 is used to send second broadcast information to the device 40. The instruction information carried in the second broadcast information indicates the color and sequence of the color devices on the vehicle within the preset range of the positioning grating, so that the device 40 can follow the second broadcast The information determines whether it is within the preset range of the positioning system (eg, positioning grating). In some possible embodiments, the transmitter 313 is also used to send a map of the semi-enclosed space to the device 30 or the device 40.
接收器312和发送器313可包括用于直接或通过空中接口与车辆内的设备、传感器或其它实体设备通信的天线和芯片集。发送器313和收发器312组成通信模块,通信模块可被配置为根据一个或多个其它类型的无线通信(例如,协议)来接收和发送信息,所述无线通信诸如蓝牙、IEEE 802.11通信协议、蜂窝技术、全球微波互联接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)或LTE(Long Term Evolution,长期演进)、ZigBee协议、专用短程通信(Dedicated Short Range Communications,DSRC)以及RFID(Radio Frequency Identification,射频识别)通信,等等。The receiver 312 and the transmitter 313 may include antennas and chipsets for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface. The transmitter 313 and the transceiver 312 constitute a communication module, and the communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
存储器311可以包括易失性存储器(Volatile Memory),例如随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM);存储器311也可以包括非易失性存储器(Non-Volatile Memory),例如只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、快闪存储器(Flash Memory)、硬盘(Hard Disk Drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(Solid-State Drive,SSD);存储器311还可以包括上述种类的组合。存储器311可以存储程序以及数据,其中,存储的程序包括:目标识别算法、颜色解析程序等,存储的数据包括:半封闭空间的地图、颜色装置(例如,标识灯组)的颜色编码、摄像机的离地高度、颜色装置的离地高度、颜色装置的颜色解析结果、颜色装置所在车辆距离定位系统的第三距离等。存储器311可以单独存在,也可以集成于处理器310内部。The memory 311 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 311 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 311 may also include a combination of the above types. The memory 311 can store programs and data. The stored programs include target recognition algorithms, color analysis programs, etc., and the stored data includes maps in a semi-enclosed space, color codes for color devices (for example, identification light groups), and camera The ground clearance, the ground clearance of the color device, the color analysis result of the color device, the third distance of the vehicle where the color device is located from the positioning system, etc. The memory 311 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 310.
处理器310由一个或者多个通用处理器构成,例如中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU),微处理器(Microcontroller Unit,MCU)或者CPU、GPU、MCU和硬件芯片的组合。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、可编程逻辑器件(Programmable Logic Device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(Complex Programmable Logic Device,CPLD)、现场可编程逻辑门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、通用阵列逻辑(Generic Array Logic,GAL)或其任意组合。处理器310被配置调用存储器 310中的程序和数据以实现上述实施例中识别第二环境图像中装置40的颜色装置214、解析颜色装置214的颜色、确定装置40是否在定位系统的预设范围内等具体操作。The processor 310 is composed of one or more general-purpose processors, such as a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU), a microprocessor (Microcontroller Unit, MCU), or a CPU, GPU, Combination of MCU and hardware chip. The aforementioned hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (Programmable Logic Device, PLD), or a combination thereof. The above-mentioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device, CPLD), a field programmable logic gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), a general array logic (Generic Array Logic, GAL), or any combination thereof. The processor 310 is configured to call the programs and data in the memory 310 to realize the recognition of the color device 214 of the device 40 in the second environment image, the analysis of the color of the color device 214, and the determination of whether the device 40 is in the preset range of the positioning system in the above embodiment. Inside and other specific operations.
本申请实施例中,装置50用于实现上述图9实施例所描述的服务器侧的方法。In the embodiment of the present application, the device 50 is used to implement the server-side method described in the embodiment of FIG. 9.
参见图20,图20是本申请实施例提供的一种监测装置的结构示意图,监测装置60至少包括:处理器410、存储器411和接收器412。该接收器412也可以替换为通信接口,用于为处理器410提供信息输入。可选的,存储器411、接收器412和处理器410通过总线连接或耦合。在此情况下,监测装置60可以集成于装置30的图像采集装置114中或者处理器110中,也可以独立存在于装置30中,本申请不做具体限定。此时对应的车辆定位场景为:车辆上设置有图像采集装置(例如,摄像机),半封闭空间中设置有一一对应的颜色装置和定位装置,监测装置60可以集成于车辆的图像采集装置中,也可以集成于车辆中独立于图像采集装置而存在。例如,监测装置60可以集成于装置30的图像采集装置114中,也可以集成于装置30的处理器110中,本申请不做具体限定。Referring to FIG. 20, FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a monitoring device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The monitoring device 60 at least includes a processor 410, a memory 411, and a receiver 412. The receiver 412 can also be replaced with a communication interface for providing information input for the processor 410. Optionally, the memory 411, the receiver 412, and the processor 410 are connected or coupled through a bus. In this case, the monitoring device 60 can be integrated in the image acquisition device 114 or the processor 110 of the device 30, or can exist independently in the device 30, which is not specifically limited in this application. At this time, the corresponding vehicle positioning scene is: an image acquisition device (for example, a camera) is set on the vehicle, a one-to-one corresponding color device and a positioning device are set in a semi-enclosed space, and the monitoring device 60 can be integrated into the image acquisition device of the vehicle , Can also be integrated in the vehicle and exist independently of the image acquisition device. For example, the monitoring device 60 may be integrated in the image acquisition device 114 of the device 30, or may be integrated in the processor 110 of the device 30, which is not specifically limited in this application.
接收器412用于获取包含颜色装置的环境图像,该环境图像可以是装置30的图像采集装置114采集的,在此情况下,接收器412可包括用于直接或通过空中接口与车内图像采集装置通信的天线和芯片集。The receiver 412 is used to obtain an environmental image including a color device. The environmental image may be captured by the image capture device 114 of the device 30. In this case, the receiver 412 may include a device for capturing images in the vehicle directly or through an air interface. Antenna and chipset for device communication.
处理器410由一个或者多个通用处理器和/或专用处理器构成,具体地,处理器410可以是中央处理器、微处理器、单片机、数字信号处理器、图像处理器等中的一个或多个。处理器410调用存储器411中的数据和程序用于实现根据环境图像、采集该环境图像的图像采集装置与颜色装置的位置关系获得颜色装置与图像采集装置之间的水平距离,并根据该水平距离确定车辆是否位于半封闭空间中定位装置的预设范围内,以便于车辆在确定自身位于定位装置的预设范围内时根据该定位装置的位置信息实现定位。The processor 410 is composed of one or more general-purpose processors and/or special-purpose processors. Specifically, the processor 410 may be one of a central processing unit, a microprocessor, a single-chip computer, a digital signal processor, an image processor, etc. Multiple. The processor 410 calls the data and programs in the memory 411 to obtain the horizontal distance between the color device and the image capture device according to the environmental image and the positional relationship between the image capture device that captures the environmental image and the color device, and according to the horizontal distance It is determined whether the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device in the semi-enclosed space, so that the vehicle can realize positioning according to the position information of the positioning device when it is determined that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device.
存储器411可以包括易失性存储器(Volatile Memory),例如随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM);存储器411也可以包括非易失性存储器(Non-Volatile Memory),例如只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、快闪存储器(Flash Memory)、硬盘(Hard Disk Drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(Solid-State Drive,SSD);存储器411还可以包括上述种类的组合。存储器411可以存储程序以及数据,其中,存储的程序包括:颜色解析算法、目标检测算法等,存储的数据包括:颜色装置的颜色编码-离地高度映射信息、图像采集装置的离地高度、颜色装置的图像、颜色装置的解析结果、各种距离(例如,颜色装置与摄像机的距离、颜色装置与图像采集装置的水平距离、颜色装置与图像采集装置之间的垂直高度差等)等。存储器411可以单独存在,也可以集成于处理器410内部。The memory 411 may include a volatile memory (Volatile Memory), such as a random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM); the memory 411 may also include a non-volatile memory (Non-Volatile Memory), such as a read-only memory (Read-only memory). Only Memory, ROM, Flash Memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or Solid-State Drive (SSD); the memory 411 may also include a combination of the above types. The memory 411 can store programs and data. The stored programs include color analysis algorithms, target detection algorithms, etc. The stored data includes: color coding of color devices-ground clearance mapping information, ground clearance of image acquisition devices, color The image of the device, the analysis result of the color device, various distances (for example, the distance between the color device and the camera, the horizontal distance between the color device and the image capture device, the vertical height difference between the color device and the image capture device, etc.). The memory 411 may exist alone or may be integrated inside the processor 410.
在一些可能的实施例中,监测装置60还包括发送器413,发送器413也可以替换为通信接口,用于为处理器410提供信息输出。可选的,发送器413与存储器411、接收器412和处理器410通过总线连接或耦合。在此情况下,监测装置60可以集成于装置50中。此时对应的车辆定位场景为:车辆上设置颜色装置,半封闭空间中设置有一一对应的图像采集装置和定位装置,监测装置60可以集成于半封闭空间的图像采集装置中或服务器中。In some possible embodiments, the monitoring device 60 further includes a transmitter 413, and the transmitter 413 may also be replaced with a communication interface for providing information output for the processor 410. Optionally, the transmitter 413 is connected or coupled with the memory 411, the receiver 412, and the processor 410 through a bus. In this case, the monitoring device 60 can be integrated in the device 50. At this time, the corresponding vehicle positioning scenario is: a color device is set on the vehicle, a corresponding image acquisition device and positioning device are set in a semi-enclosed space, and the monitoring device 60 can be integrated into an image acquisition device or a server in the semi-enclosed space.
发送器413用于在处理器410经处理确定车辆在定位装置的预设范围内时,向外发送第二广播信息,第二广播信息指示了位于定位装置的预设范围内的车辆上颜色装置的颜色 和顺序,以使车辆根据第二广播信息确定自身在该定位装置的预设范围内时,根据该定位装置的位置信息进行定位。发送器413可包括用于直接或通过空中接口与车内的设备、传感器或其它实体设备通信的天线和芯片集。The transmitter 413 is used for sending out second broadcast information when the processor 410 determines that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device. The second broadcast information indicates the color device on the vehicle located within the preset range of the positioning device. The color and sequence of the positioning device, so that when the vehicle determines that it is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information, it performs positioning according to the position information of the positioning device. The transmitter 413 may include an antenna and chipset for communicating with devices, sensors, or other physical devices in the vehicle directly or through an air interface.
接收器412和发送器413组成通信模块,通信模块可被配置为根据一个或多个其它类型的无线通信(例如,协议)来接收和发送信息,所述无线通信诸如蓝牙、IEEE 802.11通信协议、蜂窝技术、全球微波互联接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)或LTE(Long Term Evolution,长期演进)、ZigBee协议、专用短程通信(Dedicated Short Range Communications,DSRC)以及RFID(Radio Frequency Identification,射频识别)通信,等等。The receiver 412 and the transmitter 413 constitute a communication module, and the communication module can be configured to receive and send information according to one or more other types of wireless communication (for example, protocols), such as Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11 communication protocols, Cellular technology, Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) or LTE (Long Term Evolution), ZigBee protocol, Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC), and RFID (Radio Frequency Identification, radio frequency) Identification) communication, etc.
需要说明的是,当监测装置60集成于服务器时,接收器412用于获取包含颜色装置的环境图像是指接收器412接收设置于半封闭空间中的图像采集装置发送的包含颜色装置的环境图像。在此情况下,接收器412可包括用于直接或通过空中接口与半封闭空间内的图像采集装置通信的天线和芯片集。It should be noted that when the monitoring device 60 is integrated in the server, the receiver 412 is used to obtain the environmental image containing the color device means that the receiver 412 receives the environmental image containing the color device sent by the image acquisition device set in a semi-enclosed space . In this case, the receiver 412 may include an antenna and chipset for communicating with an image capture device in a semi-enclosed space directly or through an air interface.
参见图21,图21是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的功能结构示意图,装置32包括监测单元320、获取单元321和定位单元322。该装置32可以通过硬件、软件或者软硬件结合的方式来实现。装置32可以是图1或图2中的车辆。Referring to FIG. 21, FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The device 32 includes a monitoring unit 320, an obtaining unit 321, and a positioning unit 322. The device 32 can be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware. The device 32 may be the vehicle in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2.
其中,监测单元320,用于在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测车辆是否位于半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;获取单元321,用于在车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,获取地图中定位系统在半封闭空间中的位置信息;定位单元322,用于根据位置信息在地图中对车辆进行定位。Among them, the monitoring unit 320 is used to monitor whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space; the acquisition unit 321 is used to monitor whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space Next, obtain the position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map; the positioning unit 322 is configured to locate the vehicle on the map according to the position information.
该装置32的各功能模块可用于实现图6实施例所描述的车辆侧的方法,即装置32为图1中的车辆。在此情况下,可选地,装置32还包括采集单元323,用于采集设置于半封闭空间中的颜色装置的图像。在图6的实施例中,获取单元321可用于执行S301、S302和S306,采集单元323可用于执行S303,监测单元320可用于执行S304和S305,定位单元322可用于执行S307和S308。The functional modules of the device 32 can be used to implement the vehicle-side method described in the embodiment in FIG. 6, that is, the device 32 is the vehicle in FIG. 1. In this case, optionally, the device 32 further includes a collection unit 323 for collecting images of the color device arranged in the semi-enclosed space. In the embodiment of FIG. 6, the acquisition unit 321 can be used to perform S301, S302, and S306, the collection unit 323 can be used to perform S303, the monitoring unit 320 can be used to perform S304 and S305, and the positioning unit 322 can be used to perform S307 and S308.
该装置32的各功能模块还可用于实现图13实施例所描述的车辆侧的方法,即装置52为图2中的车辆。在图6的实施例中,获取单元321可用于执行S501和S502,监测单元320可用于执行S507,定位单元322可用于执行S509和S510。The functional modules of the device 32 can also be used to implement the vehicle-side method described in the embodiment in FIG. 13, that is, the device 52 is the vehicle in FIG. 2. In the embodiment of FIG. 6, the acquiring unit 321 can be used to perform S501 and S502, the monitoring unit 320 can be used to perform S507, and the positioning unit 322 can be used to perform S509 and S510.
该装置32的各功能模块还可以用于执行图4和图5中车辆侧的方法,为了说明书的简洁,本申请在此不再赘述。The functional modules of the device 32 can also be used to execute the method on the vehicle side in FIG. 4 and FIG.
参见图22,图22是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的功能结构示意图,装置52包括监测单元520、广播单元521和获取单元522。该装置52可以通过硬件、软件或者软硬件结合的方式来实现。装置52可以是图2中的服务器。Referring to FIG. 22, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The device 52 includes a monitoring unit 520, a broadcasting unit 521, and an acquiring unit 522. The device 52 can be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware. The device 52 may be the server in FIG. 2.
其中,监测单元520,在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测车辆是否位于半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;广播单元521,用于在监测到车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,发送第二广播信息,第二广播信息用于指示车辆位于定位系统的预设范围内,以便 于车辆根据定位系统的位置信息进行定位。Among them, the monitoring unit 520, after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, monitors whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space; the broadcasting unit 521 is used to monitor the situation that the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system Next, the second broadcast information is sent, and the second broadcast information is used to indicate that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system, so that the vehicle can locate according to the position information of the positioning system.
该装置32的各功能模块可用于实现图13实施例所描述的服务器侧的方法,在图13的实施例中,获取单元522可用于执行S503,监测单元520可用于执行S504和S505,广播单元521可用于执行S506。The functional modules of the device 32 can be used to implement the server-side method described in the embodiment of FIG. 13. In the embodiment of FIG. 13, the obtaining unit 522 can be used to perform S503, and the monitoring unit 520 can be used to perform S504 and S505. 521 can be used to execute S506.
在一些可能的实施例中,装置52还可以是图3中的摄像机,在此情况下,以图13实施例为例,即图13中的服务器可由图像采集装置(例如,摄像机)替代。为了说明书的简洁,在此不再赘述。In some possible embodiments, the device 52 may also be the camera in FIG. 3. In this case, taking the embodiment in FIG. 13 as an example, the server in FIG. 13 may be replaced by an image acquisition device (for example, a camera). For the sake of brevity of the description, it will not be repeated here.
参见图23,图23是本申请实施例提供的一种装置的功能结构示意图,装置62包括获取单元620和处理单元621。在此情况下,装置62可以集成于图1车辆的摄像机中或图1中的车辆里且独立于摄像机存在。可选地,在一些可能的实施例中,装置62还包括广播单元622,在此情况下,装置62可以集成于图2中的服务器或者图3中设置于半封闭空间中的摄像机。需要说明的是,上述中的摄像机仅是图像采集装置的一种示例,摄像机还可由相机或其他图像采集装置代替,本申请不做具体限定。该装置62可以通过硬件、软件或者软硬件结合的方式来实现。Referring to FIG. 23, FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of the functional structure of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The device 62 includes an obtaining unit 620 and a processing unit 621. In this case, the device 62 may be integrated in the camera of the vehicle in FIG. 1 or in the vehicle in FIG. 1 and exist independently of the camera. Optionally, in some possible embodiments, the device 62 further includes a broadcasting unit 622. In this case, the device 62 may be integrated into the server in FIG. 2 or the camera set in the semi-enclosed space in FIG. 3. It should be noted that the above-mentioned camera is only an example of an image acquisition device, and the camera can also be replaced by a camera or other image acquisition device, which is not specifically limited in this application. The device 62 can be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
其中,获取单元620,用于获取图像采集装置采集的环境图像,环境图像包含颜色装置的图像;处理单元621,用于根据环境图像确定颜色装置与图像采集装置之间的距离;根据图像采集装置和颜色装置之间的位置关系以及颜色装置与图像采集装置之间的距离,确定图像采集装置与颜色装置之间的水平距离;根据图像采集装置与颜色装置之间的水平距离,确定在车辆进入半封闭空间后车辆位于半封闭空间中定位装置的预设范围内,以便于车辆根据定位装置的位置信息进行定位;在一些可能的实施例中,广播单元622用于在车辆位于定位装置的预设范围内时,发送第二广播信息,以使车辆根据第二广播信息确定车辆是否位于定位装置的预设范围内。Among them, the acquisition unit 620 is used to acquire the environmental image collected by the image acquisition device, and the environmental image contains the image of the color device; the processing unit 621 is used to determine the distance between the color device and the image acquisition device according to the environmental image; The positional relationship between the color device and the color device and the distance between the color device and the image capture device to determine the horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device; according to the horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device, it is determined when the vehicle enters After the semi-enclosed space, the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device in the semi-enclosed space, so that the vehicle can be positioned according to the position information of the positioning device; When the range is set, the second broadcast information is sent, so that the vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning device according to the second broadcast information.
该装置62的各功能模块可用于实现图6实施例所描述的车辆侧的方法,在图6的实施例中,获取单元620可用于执行S303,处理单元621可用于执行S304和S305。The functional modules of the device 62 can be used to implement the method on the vehicle side described in the embodiment in FIG.
该装置62的各功能模块还可用于实现图13实施例所描述的服务器侧的方法,在图13的实施例中,获取单元620可用于执行S503,处理单元621可用于执行S504和S505,广播单元622可用于执行S506。The functional modules of the device 62 can also be used to implement the server-side method described in the embodiment of FIG. 13. In the embodiment of FIG. 13, the obtaining unit 620 can be used to perform S503, and the processing unit 621 can be used to perform S504 and S505. Unit 622 can be used to perform S506.
装置62的各功能模块还可用于执行图4的S101以及图5的S202,为了说明书的简洁,在此不再赘述。The functional modules of the device 62 can also be used to execute S101 in FIG. 4 and S202 in FIG.
在本文上述的实施例中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详细描述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。In the above-mentioned embodiments herein, the description of each embodiment has its own focus. For parts that are not described in detail in an embodiment, reference may be made to related descriptions of other embodiments.
需要说明的是,本领域普通技术人员可以看到上述实施例的各种方法中的全部或部分步骤是可以通过程序来指令相关的硬件来完成,该程序可以存储于一计算机可读存储介质中,存储介质包括只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable Read-only Memory,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory,EPROM)、一次可编程只 读存储器(One-time Programmable Read-Only Memory,OTPROM)、电子抹除式可复写只读存储(Electrically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储器、磁盘存储器、磁带存储器、或者能够用于携带或存储数据的计算机可读的任何其他介质。It should be noted that those of ordinary skill in the art can see that all or part of the steps in the various methods of the above-mentioned embodiments can be completed by instructing relevant hardware through a program, and the program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. , Storage media include read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (RAM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable Read-only Memory, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory ( Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM), One-time Programmable Read-Only Memory (OTPROM), Electronically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM), CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory) or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage, tape storage, or any other computer-readable medium that can be used to carry or store data.
本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备、机器人、单片机、芯片、机器人等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。The technical solution of this application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions. This allows a device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, a robot, a single-chip computer, a chip, a robot, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.

Claims (24)

  1. 一种车辆定位方法,应用于车辆,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A vehicle positioning method applied to a vehicle, characterized in that the method includes:
    在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;After the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space;
    在所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,获取地图中所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息;In the case that the vehicle is located within a preset range of the positioning system, acquiring position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on a map;
    根据所述位置信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位。Positioning the vehicle on the map according to the location information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the monitoring whether the vehicle is located within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space comprises:
    确定所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第一距离;Determining the first distance between the vehicle and the positioning system;
    根据所述第一距离确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。It is determined whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the first distance.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述定位系统包括第一颜色装置和定位装置,所述地图还包括指示所述第一颜色装置的离地高度的信息;所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发第一广播信息;The method according to claim 2, wherein the positioning system includes a first color device and a positioning device, and the map further includes information indicating the height of the first color device from the ground; the positioning device uses Triggering the first broadcast message when the vehicle is located at the positioning device;
    所述确定所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第一距离,包括:The determining the first distance between the vehicle and the positioning system includes:
    拍摄第一环境图像,所述第一环境图像包含所述第一颜色装置的图像;Taking a first environmental image, the first environmental image including an image of the first color device;
    根据所述第一环境图像确定所述车辆与所述第一颜色装置之间的第二距离;Determining a second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image;
    根据所述第二距离和所述第一颜色装置的离地高度,获得所述第一距离。The first distance is obtained according to the second distance and the height of the first color device from the ground.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述定位系统包括第一颜色装置和定位装置,所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发第一广播信息;所述第一广播信息包括所述定位装置的位置信息;The method according to claim 1, wherein the positioning system comprises a first color device and a positioning device, and the positioning device is used to trigger the first broadcast information when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; The first broadcast information includes location information of the positioning device;
    所述获取地图中所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息,包括:The acquiring location information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space on the map includes:
    根据所述定位装置发送的第一广播信息获得所述定位装置的位置信息;Obtaining the location information of the positioning device according to the first broadcast information sent by the positioning device;
    根据所述定位装置的位置信息确定所述定位系统在所述半封闭空间中的位置信息。The position information of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space is determined according to the position information of the positioning device.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第一环境图像确定所述车辆与所述第一颜色装置之间的第二距离,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the determining the second distance between the vehicle and the first color device according to the first environment image comprises:
    从所述第一环境图像中识别出所述第一颜色装置;Identifying the first color device from the first environmental image;
    根据所述第一颜色装置的图像确定所述第二距离。The second distance is determined based on the image of the first color device.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 5, wherein:
    所述第一颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;The first color device includes one or more identification lights;
    所述从所述第一环境图像中识别出所述第一颜色装置,包括:The recognizing the first color device from the first environment image includes:
    通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述第一颜色装置。The first color device is recognized by recognizing the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights.
  7. 根据权利要求3-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述定位装置包括定位光栅或地磁感应器。The method according to any one of claims 3-6, wherein the positioning device comprises a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  8. 根据权利要求3-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 3-7, wherein the method further comprises:
    在所述车辆不位于所述定位系统的预设范围内时,丢弃所述第一广播信息。When the vehicle is not within the preset range of the positioning system, discarding the first broadcast information.
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the monitoring whether the vehicle is located within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space comprises:
    接收第二广播信息,所述第二广播信息用于指示位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的车辆;Receiving second broadcast information, where the second broadcast information is used to indicate vehicles located within a preset range of the positioning system;
    根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述车辆设置有第二颜色装置,所述第二颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述第二广播信息携带指示信息,所述指示信息指示了一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序;The method according to claim 9, wherein the vehicle is provided with a second color device, and the second color device includes one or more identification lights; the second broadcast information carries instruction information, and the instruction The information indicates the color and sequence of one or more identification lights;
    所述根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内,包括:The determining whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the second broadcast information includes:
    根据所述第二广播信息指示的一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序是否与所述第二颜色装置匹配,来确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to whether the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights indicated by the second broadcast information match the second color device.
  11. 根据权利要求1-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述根据所述位置信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行定位之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-10, characterized in that, after the positioning of the vehicle on the map according to the location information, the method further comprises:
    获取所述车辆的运动信息;Acquiring movement information of the vehicle;
    根据所述车辆的位置信息和所述车辆的运动信息在所述地图中对所述车辆进行导航。The vehicle is navigated in the map according to the position information of the vehicle and the movement information of the vehicle.
  12. 一种车辆定位方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A vehicle positioning method, characterized in that the method includes:
    在车辆进入半封闭空间后,监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内;After the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, monitoring whether the vehicle is within the preset range of the positioning system in the semi-enclosed space;
    在监测到所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内的情况下,发送第二广播信息,所述第二广播信息用于指示所述车辆位于所述定位系统的预设范围内,以便于所述车辆根据所述定位系统的位置信息进行定位。In the case of detecting that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system, send second broadcast information, the second broadcast information being used to indicate that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning system, so that The vehicle is positioned according to the position information of the positioning system.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述监测所述车辆是否位于所述半封闭空间中定位系统的预设范围内包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein the monitoring whether the vehicle is located within a preset range of a positioning system in the semi-enclosed space comprises:
    监测所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第三距离;Monitoring the third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system;
    根据所述第三距离确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。Determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the third distance.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述定位系统包括图像采集装置和定 位装置,所述地图还包括指示所述图像采集装置的离地高度的信息;所述定位装置用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置处时触发包含所述定位装置的位置信息的第一广播信息;所述车辆上设置有第二颜色装置;The method according to claim 13, wherein the positioning system includes an image acquisition device and a positioning device, and the map further includes information indicating the height of the image acquisition device from the ground; the positioning device is used for Triggering the first broadcast message containing the location information of the positioning device when the vehicle is located at the positioning device; a second color device is provided on the vehicle;
    所述监测所述车辆与所述定位系统之间的第三距离,包括;The monitoring the third distance between the vehicle and the positioning system includes;
    获取所述图像采集装置拍摄的第二环境图像,所述第二环境图像包含所述第二颜色装置的图像;Acquiring a second environment image taken by the image acquisition device, where the second environment image includes the image of the second color device;
    根据所述第二环境图像确定所述车辆与所述图像采集装置之间的第四距离;Determining a fourth distance between the vehicle and the image acquisition device according to the second environment image;
    根据所述第四距离和所述图像采集装置的离地高度,获得所述第三距离。The third distance is obtained according to the fourth distance and the height of the image acquisition device from the ground.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述第二环境图像确定所述车辆与所述图像采集装置之间的第四距离,包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein the determining a fourth distance between the vehicle and the image acquisition device according to the second environment image comprises:
    从所述第二环境图像中识别出所述第二颜色装置;Identifying the second color device from the second environment image;
    根据所述第二颜色装置的图像确定所述第四距离。The fourth distance is determined according to the image of the second color device.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;The method according to claim 15, wherein the second color device includes one or more identification lights;
    所述从所述第二环境图像中识别出所述第二颜色装置,包括:The recognizing the second color device from the second environment image includes:
    通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述第二颜色装置。The second color device is recognized by recognizing the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二广播信息携带了指示信息,所述指示信息指示了所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序,所述指示信息用于指示所述车辆根据所述指示信息指示的颜色和顺序确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位系统的预设范围内。The method according to claim 16, wherein the second broadcast information carries indication information, the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights, and the indication information is used to indicate The vehicle determines whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning system according to the color and sequence indicated by the indication information.
  18. 根据权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述定位装置包括定位光栅或地磁感应器。The method according to any one of claims 14-17, wherein the positioning device comprises a positioning grating or a geomagnetic sensor.
  19. 一种监测装置,其特征在于,所述监测装置包括接收器和处理器,其中,所述接收器用于获取图像采集装置采集的环境图像,所述环境图像包含颜色装置的图像;所述处理器用于:A monitoring device, characterized in that the monitoring device comprises a receiver and a processor, wherein the receiver is used to obtain an environmental image collected by an image acquisition device, the environmental image includes an image of a color device; the processor is used for At:
    根据所述环境图像确定所述颜色装置与所述图像采集装置之间的距离;Determining the distance between the color device and the image acquisition device according to the environmental image;
    根据所述图像采集装置和所述颜色装置之间的位置关系以及所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的距离确定所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的水平距离;Determine the horizontal distance between the image capture device and the color device according to the positional relationship between the image capture device and the color device and the distance between the image capture device and the color device;
    根据所述图像采集装置与所述颜色装置之间的水平距离,确定在车辆进入所述半封闭空间后所述车辆位于所述半封闭空间中定位装置的预设范围内,以便于所述车辆根据所述定位装置的位置信息进行定位。According to the horizontal distance between the image acquisition device and the color device, it is determined that the vehicle is located within the preset range of the positioning device in the semi-enclosed space after the vehicle enters the semi-enclosed space, so as to facilitate the vehicle Perform positioning according to the position information of the positioning device.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理器具体用于:The device according to claim 19, wherein the processor is specifically configured to:
    从所述环境图像中识别出所述颜色装置;Identifying the color device from the environmental image;
    根据所述颜色装置的图像确定所述颜色装置与所述图像采集装置之间的距离。The distance between the color device and the image acquisition device is determined according to the image of the color device.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的装置,其特征在于,所述颜色装置包括一个或多个标识灯;所述处理器具体用于:The device according to claim 20, wherein the color device comprises one or more identification lights; and the processor is specifically configured to:
    通过识别所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序来识别出所述颜色装置。The color device is recognized by recognizing the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights.
  22. 根据权利要求19-21任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 19-21, wherein:
    所述监测装置还包括:发送器,用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置的预设范围内时,发送第二广播信息,以使所述车辆根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。The monitoring device further includes: a transmitter, configured to send second broadcast information when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device, so that the vehicle can determine the vehicle according to the second broadcast information Whether it is located within the preset range of the positioning device.
  23. 根据权利要求19-21任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 19-21, wherein:
    所述接收器具体用于:接收所述图像采集装置发送的所述环境图像;The receiver is specifically configured to: receive the environmental image sent by the image acquisition device;
    所述监测装置还包括:发送器,用于在所述车辆位于所述定位装置的预设范围内时,发送第二广播信息,以使所述车辆根据所述第二广播信息确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。The monitoring device further includes: a transmitter, configured to send second broadcast information when the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device, so that the vehicle can determine the vehicle according to the second broadcast information Whether it is located within the preset range of the positioning device.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二广播信息携带了指示信息,所述指示信息指示了所述一个或多个标识灯的颜色和顺序,所述指示信息用于指示所述车辆根据所述指示信息指示的颜色和顺序确定所述车辆是否位于所述定位装置的预设范围内。The device according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the second broadcast information carries indication information, the indication information indicates the color and sequence of the one or more identification lights, and the indication information is Instructing the vehicle to determine whether the vehicle is within a preset range of the positioning device according to the color and sequence indicated by the instruction information.
PCT/CN2021/085478 2020-05-21 2021-04-03 Vehicle positioning method and device WO2021232971A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010438125.8 2020-05-21
CN202010438125.8A CN113701738A (en) 2020-05-21 2020-05-21 Vehicle positioning method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021232971A1 true WO2021232971A1 (en) 2021-11-25

Family

ID=78645944

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/085478 WO2021232971A1 (en) 2020-05-21 2021-04-03 Vehicle positioning method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113701738A (en)
WO (1) WO2021232971A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114440874B (en) * 2021-12-31 2022-11-01 深圳市云鼠科技开发有限公司 Fusion positioning method and device based on optical flow and grating

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007240380A (en) * 2006-03-09 2007-09-20 Alpine Electronics Inc Intra-tunnel position detector
WO2009098319A2 (en) * 2008-02-09 2009-08-13 Trw Limited Navigational device for a vehicle
CN104517457A (en) * 2013-09-30 2015-04-15 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 Positioning light source device, positioning device and positioning method
CN104748754A (en) * 2013-12-31 2015-07-01 财团法人车辆研究测试中心 Vehicle positioning method and vehicle positioning system thereof
CN104748736A (en) * 2013-12-26 2015-07-01 电信科学技术研究院 Positioning method and device
CN107907897A (en) * 2017-10-31 2018-04-13 平潭诚信智创科技有限公司 A kind of intelligent tunnel guider and navigation system based on LIFI
CN108535753A (en) * 2018-03-30 2018-09-14 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Vehicle positioning method, device and equipment
CN110164166A (en) * 2018-02-11 2019-08-23 北京图森未来科技有限公司 A kind of vehicle positioning system, method and apparatus
CN111161449A (en) * 2020-01-07 2020-05-15 东南大学 Vehicle large-scale parking lot interior positioning method based on automobile data recorder image

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110164135B (en) * 2019-01-14 2022-08-02 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Positioning method, positioning device and positioning system

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007240380A (en) * 2006-03-09 2007-09-20 Alpine Electronics Inc Intra-tunnel position detector
WO2009098319A2 (en) * 2008-02-09 2009-08-13 Trw Limited Navigational device for a vehicle
CN104517457A (en) * 2013-09-30 2015-04-15 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 Positioning light source device, positioning device and positioning method
CN104748736A (en) * 2013-12-26 2015-07-01 电信科学技术研究院 Positioning method and device
CN104748754A (en) * 2013-12-31 2015-07-01 财团法人车辆研究测试中心 Vehicle positioning method and vehicle positioning system thereof
CN107907897A (en) * 2017-10-31 2018-04-13 平潭诚信智创科技有限公司 A kind of intelligent tunnel guider and navigation system based on LIFI
CN110164166A (en) * 2018-02-11 2019-08-23 北京图森未来科技有限公司 A kind of vehicle positioning system, method and apparatus
CN108535753A (en) * 2018-03-30 2018-09-14 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Vehicle positioning method, device and equipment
CN111161449A (en) * 2020-01-07 2020-05-15 东南大学 Vehicle large-scale parking lot interior positioning method based on automobile data recorder image

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113701738A (en) 2021-11-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110174093B (en) Positioning method, device, equipment and computer readable storage medium
CN107161141B (en) Unmanned automobile system and automobile
KR102534792B1 (en) Sparse map for autonomous vehicle navigation
CN105793669B (en) Vehicle position estimation system, device, method, and camera device
CN113840765A (en) System and method for vehicle navigation
KR102552520B1 (en) AUTOMATED OBJECT ANNOTATION USING FUSED CAMERA/LiDAR DATA POINTS
EP3647734A1 (en) Automatic generation of dimensionally reduced maps and spatiotemporal localization for navigation of a vehicle
US20180188046A1 (en) Creation and use of enhanced maps
WO2019007263A1 (en) Method and device for calibrating external parameters of vehicle-mounted sensor
CN110945320B (en) Vehicle positioning method and system
JP5365792B2 (en) Vehicle position measuring device
KR20210061722A (en) Method, apparatus, computer program and computer readable recording medium for producing high definition map
CN110443819B (en) Method and device for detecting track of monorail train
WO2021036210A1 (en) Positioning method and positioning device
JP2006215982A (en) Method, apparatus and system for calculating distance to intersection
JP2007010335A (en) Vehicle position detecting device and system
EP4127607B1 (en) Systems and methods for optimizing map tile requests for navigation
CN112485815A (en) Distributed information generation device and method for positioning difference between accurate positioning information and GNSS positioning information
CN110717438A (en) Traffic signal lamp identification method and device
CN114930123A (en) System and method for detecting traffic lights
CN108335507B (en) Method and device for providing driving guidance by using camera to shoot image
CN116601681A (en) Estimating automatic exposure values of a camera by prioritizing objects of interest based on relevant inputs of a 3D map
US20230085455A1 (en) Vehicle condition estimation method, vehicle condition estimation device, and vehicle condition estimation program
WO2021232971A1 (en) Vehicle positioning method and device
CN114449481A (en) Method and system for determining current signal light color of lane based on V2X technology

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21809053

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21809053

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1